10 - KX-DB-147 VRF Inverter Multi-System Air Conditioners 220V (FDC224-FDC335)

KX6 series
FDC224KXE6M, 280KXE6M, 335KXE6M

FDCS224KXE6M, 280KXE6M, 335KXE6M(Corrosion Protection Treatment series)
(INDOOR UNIT) -KX6 series-
(Heat pump type)
Manual No. '10

KX-DB-147
DATA BOOK
(OUTDOOR UNIT)
VRF INVERTER MULTI-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
Alternative refrigerant R410A use models
FDT28KXE6D
FDT36KXE6D
FDT45KXE6D
FDT56KXE6D
FDT71KXE6D
FDT90KXE6D
FDT112KXE6D
FDT140KXE6D
FDT160KXE6D
FDTC22KXE6D
FDTC28KXE6D
FDTC36KXE6D
FDTC45KXE6D
FDTC56KXE6D
FDTW28KXE6D
FDTW45KXE6D
FDTW56KXE6D
FDTS45KXE6D
FDTS71KXE6D
FDTQ22KXE6D
FDTQ28KXE6D
FDTQ36KXE6D
FDU500FKXE6D
FDU850FKXE6D
FDU1300FKXE6D
FDU1800FKXE6D
FDUM22KXE6D
FDUM28KXE6D
FDUM36KXE6D
FDUM45KXE6D
FDUM56KXE6D
FDUM71KXE6D
FDUM90KXE6D
FDUM112KXE6D
FDUM140KXE6D
FDUT22KXE6D
FDUT28KXE6D
FDUT36KXE6D
FDUT45KXE6D
FDUT56KXE6D
FDK22KXE6D
FDK28KXE6D
FDK36KXE6D
FDK45KXE6D
FDK56KXE6D
FDK71KXE6D
FDUH22KXE6D
FDUH28KXE6D
FDUH36KXE6D
FDE36KXE6D
FDE45KXE6D
FDE56KXE6D
FDE71KXE6D
FDE112KXE6D
FDE140KXE6D
FDU224KXE6D
FDU280KXE6D
FDFW28KXE6D
FDFW45KXE6D
FDFW56KXE6D
Regarding the Duct Connected-High static Pressure-type Outdoor Air Processing Unit Series
(FDU5001800FKXE6), refer to the DATA BOOK No.'08
KX-DB-122

Note
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................... 1
1.1 Increased indoor unit connection capacity .................................................... 1
1.2 How to read the model name ........................................................................ 1
1.3 Table of models ............................................................................................. 2
1.4 Table of indoor units panel (Optional) ........................................................... 2
1.5 Branch pipe set and Header pipe set ............................................................ 2
2 OUTDOOR UNIT ................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Specications ................................................................................................ 3
2.2 Exterior dimensions ....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Electrical wiring ............................................................................................. 7
2.4 Noise level ..................................................................................................... 9
2.5 Corrosion protection treatment series ......................................................... 10
3 INDOOR UNIT .................................................................................................. 11
3.1 Specications .............................................................................................. 11
(a) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT) ....................................................... 11
(b) Ceiling cassette-4 way compact type (FDTC)...................................... 13
(c) Ceiling cassette-2 way type (FDTW) ................................................... 14
(d) Ceiling cassette-1 way compact type (FDTQ) ..................................... 15
(e) Ceiling cassette-1 way type (FDTS) .................................................... 18
(f) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU) ................................ 19
(g) Duct connected-Middle static pressure type (FDUM) .......................... 20
(h) Duct connected (thin)-Low static pressure type (FDUT) ...................... 22
(i) Duct Connected-Compact and Flexible type (FDUH) .......................... 24
(j) Wall mounted type (FDK) .................................................................... 25
(k) Ceiling suspended type (FDE) ............................................................. 27
(l) Floor standing-2 way type (FDFW) ...................................................... 29
(m) Outdoor air processing unit (FDU-F).................................................... 30
3.2 Exterior dimensions ..................................................................................... 31
3.3 Electrical wiring ........................................................................................... 62
3.4 Noise level ................................................................................................... 80
3.5 Characteristics of fan .................................................................................. 88
3.6 Temperature and velocity distribution ......................................................... 95
3.7 Capacity tables ......................................................................................... 117
4 RANGE OF USAGE & LIMITATIONS ........................................................... 176
5 SELECTION CHART ..................................................................................... 178
6 PIPING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 186
7 APPLICATION DATA .................................................................................... 188
7.1 Installation of indoor unit ........................................................................... 188
(a) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT) ..................................................... 189
(b) Ceiling cassette-4 way compact type (FDTC).................................... 194
(c) Ceiling cassette-2 way type (FDTW) ................................................. 199
(d) Ceiling cassette-1 way compact type (FDTQ) ................................... 202
(e) Ceiling cassette-1 way type (FDTS) .................................................. 210
(f) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU) .............................. 213
(g) Duct connected-Middle static pressure type (FDUM) ........................ 216
(h) Duct connected (thin)-Low static pressure type (FDUT) .................... 219
(i) Duct Connected-Compact and Flexible type (FDUH) ........................ 222
(j) Wall mounted type (FDK) .................................................................. 225
(k) Ceiling suspended type (FDE) ........................................................... 228
(l) Floor standing-2 way type (FDFW) .................................................... 231
(m) Outdoor air processing unit type (FDU-F) ......................................... 234
7.2 Electric wiring work instruction .................................................................. 237
7.3 Installation manual for wired remote controller (option parts : RC-E4) .... 243
7.4 Installation of outdoor unit ....................................................................... 248
7.5 Method for connecting the accessory pipe .............................................. 264
7.6 Check operation procedure ...................................................................... 265
7.7 Instructions for installing the branch pipe set (option) ............................... 273
8 OPTIONAL PARTS ........................................................................................ 277
8.1 Wireless kit ................................................................................................ 277
(a) FDT series (RCN-T-36W-E)............................................................... 278
(b) FDTC series (RCN-TC-24W-ER) ....................................................... 285
(c) FDK series (RCN-K-E
RCN-K71-E) ................................................. 292

(d) FDE series (RCN-E-E) ....................................................................... 299
(e) FDFW series (RCN-FW-E) ................................................................ 303
(f) Except for FDT, FDTC, FDK, FDE & FDFW series (RCN-KIT3-E) .... 307
8.2 Simple wired remote controller (RCH-E3) ................................................. 313
8.3 Fan controller kit for high static pressure duct (U-FCRA) ......................... 319
-
1
-
'10 KX-DB-147
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Increased indoor unit connection capacity
Capacity from 50% to 150% is possible
FDC224KXE6M
FDCS224KXE6M
FDC280KXE6M
FDCS280KXE6M
FDC335KXE6M
FDCS335KXE6M
1 to 15 units
1 to 19 units
1 to 22 units 167 ~ 502
140 ~ 420
112 ~ 336
Number of connectable Connectable capacity
Item
Model
Note (1) If one or more indoor units of FDK and FDFW series are connected to the system, the total connecting capacity of indoor
units should not exceed 130%.
Note (2) If superlink I (previous superlink) is selected, the connectable indoor capacity should not exceed 130% of outdoor
capacity.
(2) Indoor unit
Example: FDT 28 KX E 6D
Series cord.
Application power source...See the specications
Multi KX series
Nominal capacity (nominal cooling capacity : 2.8kW)
Model name Indoor unit : FDTC, FDT, FDTW, FDTQ,
FDTS, FDU, FDUM,
FDUT, FDE, FDK,
FDFW, FDUH, FDU-F
1.2 How to read the model name
(1) Outdoor unit
Example: FDC S 224 KX E 6M
Series cord.
Application power source...See the specications
Multi KX series
Nominal capacity (nominal cooling capacity : 22.4kW)
Corrosion protection treatment series
Model name (Outdoor unit)
-
2
-
'10 KX-DB-147
1.3 Table of models
Capacity
Model
22 28 36 45 56 71 90 112 140 160 224 280
Ceiling cassette-4 way type
(FDT)

Ceiling cassette-4 way compact type
(FDTC)

(FDTW)

Ceiling cassette-1 way compact type
(FDTQ)

(FDTS)

Duct connected-High static pressure type
(FDU)

Duct connected-Low/Middle static preessure type
(FDUM)

Duct connected (thin)-Low static pressure type
(FDUT)

Duct connected-Compact and Flexible type
(FDUH)

Wall mounted type
(FDK)

Ceiling suspended type
(FDE)

Floor standing-2 way type
(FDFW)

Outdoor air processing unit
(FDU-F)

1.4 Table of indoor units panel (Optional)
Model Parts Model
T-PSA-3AW-E FDT
Capacity:28,36,45,56,71,
90,112,140,160
Capacity:22,28,36
Capacity:22,28,36
Capacity:28,45,56
Capacity:71,90
Capacity:112,140
Capacity: 45
Capacity:71
TW-PSA-25W-E
TW-PSA-35W-E
TW-PSA-45W-E
TQ-PSA-15W-E
TQ-PSB-15W-E
QR-PNA-14W-ER
QR-PNB-14W-ER
TS-PSA-29W-E
TS-PSA-39W-E
FDTS
FDTW
FDTQ
(Duct panel)
FDTQ
(Direct blow panel)
TC-PSA-25W-E FDTC Capacity:22,28,36,45,56
1.5 Branch pipe set and Header pipe set
Total capacity downstream
Less than 180
180 or more but less than 371
Branching pipe set
DIS-22-1
DIS-180-1
DIS-371-1
Total capacity downstream
Less than 180
Header set model type
HEAD4-22-1
HEAD6-180-1
HEAD8-371-1
Number of branches
4 branches at the most
(a) Branch pipe set (Option)
(b) Header pipe set (Option)
Note (1) The indoor unit of 224 or 280 capacity cannot be connected to the header.
-

3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7

O
U
T
D
O
O
R

U
N
I
T
2
.
1

S
p
e
c
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
C
B
0
0
3
Z
1
8
3
-

4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
2
.
2

E
x
t
e
r
i
o
r

d
i
m
e
n
s
i
o
n
s
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
M
,

F
D
C
S
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
M
C
P
C
B
0
0
3
Z
0
3
0
-

5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
2
8
0
K
X
E
6
M
,

F
D
C
S
2
8
0
K
X
E
6
M
C
P
C
B
0
0
3
Z
0
3
1
-

6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
3
3
5
K
X
E
6
M
,

F
D
C
S
3
3
5
K
X
E
6
M
C
P
C
B
0
0
3
Z
0
3
2
-

7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
2
.
3

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
a
l

w
i
r
i
n
g
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
M
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
M
F
D
C
S
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
M
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
M
Y
E
Y
E
Y
E
Y
E
Y
E
R
D
R
D
RD
P
C
B
0
0
3
Z
1
8
4
-

8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
3
3
5
K
X
E
6
M
,

F
D
C
S
3
3
5
K
X
E
6
M
Y
E
Y
E
Y
E
RD
R
D
Y
E
Y
E
R
D
P
C
B
0
0
3
Z
1
8
5
-
9
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Measured based on JIS B 8616
Mike position as highest noise level in position as below
Distance from front side 1m
Height 1m
2.4 Noise level
Models FDC224KXE6M, FDCS224KXE6M
Noise level 58 dB (A)
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
O
-
5

P
a
)
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz)
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
O
-
5

P
a
)
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
O
-
5

P
a
)
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
O
-
5

P
a
)
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
O
-
5

P
a
)
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
O
-
5

P
a
)

-
10
-
'10 KX-DB-147
KX6 outdoor series are available with special coating
applied for not only sheet metals but also small parts in
order to prevent salt corrosion caused by sea breeze in
area along coast line (Within approximately 500m from
coast line).
Sea breeze
Sea
Caution
Even if the outdoor unit is protected with the anti-salt damage treatment, it cannot be perfectly free from rusting.
The following points should be kept in mind during installation and maintenance of the outdoor units.
Installation
(1) When installing the outdoor unit close to the coastal area, provide a windbreak to protect it from direct sea breeze and
salt water splash.
(2) Select a well-drained place to install.
(3) If any scratch or damages occurred on the outdoor unit during installation, repair it carefully.
Maintenance
(1) Clean salt grains on the outdoor unit with fresh water periodically.
(2) Apply rust preventive at regular intervals for maintenance depending on the conditions at the installation place
(consulting with the withstanding capacity).
(3) Confirm reset of screw tap after maintenance, if missing it may cause corrosion occurred from the hole of screw tap.
(4) During prolonged non operation periods, protect the unit with covering.
Production by order
Model No.
FDCS224KXE6M
FDCS280KXE6M
FDCS335KXE6M
Nominal Cooling Capacity
22.4kW
28.0kW
33.5kW
2.5 Corrosion protection treatment series
Additional treatment from the standard series
Fin
pipe
Side plate
Description
undercoat: Cation electrodeposition coating
topcoat: polyester powder coating or acrylic baked coating
undercoat: Cation electrodeposition coating
topcoat: polyester powder coating or acrylic baked coating
application of anticorrosion compound
Precoated Aluminum Blue Fins in high anticorrosion specification
Corrosion protection treatment complies with regulation of The Japan Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Industry Association
Exterior panel
Base plate
Drain pan
Fan motor
Compressor
Accumulator
Receiver
Fan motor base
Heat exchanger
Control box
Baffle plate
Service valve bracket
Screw tap for exterior panel
Screw tap for inside of exterior panel
zinc coating + chromate treatment + fluorine coating
zinc coating + chromate treatment + fluorine coating
Parts
-

1
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.03
0.03
0.20
0.20
0.03
0.03
0.20
0.20
0.03
0.03
0.20
0.20
0.04
0.04
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.30
0.30

I
N
D
O
O
R

U
N
I
T
3
.
1

S
p
e
c
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
(
a
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
4

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

7
1
K
X
E
6
D
(3) When wireless remote controller is used, fan is 3 speed setting(Hi-Me-Lo) only. B
P
J
F
0
0
0
Z
1
8
9
-

1
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
9
0
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
6
0
K
X
E
6
D
(3) When wireless remote controller is used, fan is 3 speed setting(Hi-Me-Lo) only.
B
P
J
F
0
0
0
Z
1
8
9
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14
0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14
0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45
-

1
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
b
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
4

w
a
y

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
C
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
C
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
A
0
0
3
Z
3
7
6
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.03
0.03
0.10
0.10
0.03
0.03
0.10
0.10
0.03
0.03
0.11
0.11
0.04
0.04
0.14
0.14
220V ~ 60Hz
0.04
0.04
0.15
0.15
0
.
0
3
-

1
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
c
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
2

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
W
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
W
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
P
J
B
0
0
1
Z
6
3
8
220V ~ 60Hz
0.09
0.09
0.43
0.43
220V ~ 60Hz
0.09
0.09
0.43
0.43
220V ~ 60Hz
0.09
0.09
0.43
0.43
-

1
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
d
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
1

w
a
y

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
Q
)
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
Q
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
5
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07
0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07
0.29 0.29 0.29 0.29
0.29 0.29 0.29 0.29
-

1
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
Q
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
5
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
0.07
0.29
-

1
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
Q
3
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
5
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07
0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07
0.29 0.29 0.29 0.29
0.29 0.29 0.29 0.29
-

1
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
e
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
1

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
S
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
S
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

7
1
K
X
E
6
D
B
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
1
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.10 0.13
0.10 0.13
0.46 0.60
0.46 0.60
-

1
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
A
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
3
0
2
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
1.46 1.48
1.28 1.36
6.60 6.72
5.74 6.13
(
f
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
H
i
g
h

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
D
-

2
0

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
g
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
L
o
w
/
M
i
d
d
l
e

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
M
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
3
9
0
220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz 220V ~ 60Hz
0.16
0.16
0.69
0.69
0.16
0.16
0.69
0.69
0.13
0.13
0.57
0.57
0.13
0.13
0.57
0.57
0.10
0.10
0.43
0.43
90(at 10 CMM) 90(at 12 CMM) 90(at 12 CMM) 90(at 14 CMM) 90(at 14 CMM)
-

2
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
,

9
0
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
3
9
0
220V ~ 60Hz
0.31
0.31
1.39
1.39
220V ~ 60Hz
0.27
0.27
1.18
1.18
220V ~ 60Hz
0.18
0.18
0.79
0.79
220V ~ 60Hz
0.17
0.17
0.74
0.74
100 (at 18 CMM) 100 (at 20 CMM) 100 (at 20 CMM) 100 (at 34 CMM)
-

2
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
h
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

(
t
h
i
n
)
-
L
o
w

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
T
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
T
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
1
2
220~60Hz
0.07
0.07
0.33
0.33
220~60Hz
0.07
0.07
0.33
0.33
220~60Hz
0.06
0.06
0.28
0.28
220~60Hz
0.06
0.06
0.28
0.28
220~60Hz
0.06
0.06
0.28
0.28
220~60Hz
0.06
0.06
0.28
0.28
-

2
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
U
T
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
1
2
220 ~ 60Hz
0.14
0.14
0.65
0.65
220 ~ 60Hz
0.14
0.14
0.65
0.65
220 ~ 60Hz
0.10
0.10
0.46
0.46
220 ~ 60Hz
0.10
0.10
0.46
0.46
-

2
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
i
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
C
o
m
p
a
c
t

a
n
d

F
l
e
x
i
b
l
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
H
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
H
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
8
2
220V ~ 60Hz
0.07
0.07
0.29
0.29
220V ~ 60Hz
0.07
0.07
0.29
0.29
220V ~ 60Hz
0.07
0.07
0.29
0.29
-

2
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
j
)

W
a
l
l

m
o
u
n
t
e
d

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
K
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
K
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
H
A
0
0
1
Z
0
2
8
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
-

2
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
K
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

7
1
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
H
A
0
0
1
Z
0
2
8
220V ~ 60Hz
0.41
0.41
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
-

2
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
k
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

s
u
s
p
e
n
d
e
d

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
E
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
E
3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

7
1
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
9
0
1
220V ~ 60Hz
0.41
0.37
0.08
0.09
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
0.05
0.05
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
0.05
0.05
220V ~ 60Hz
0.23
0.23
0.05
0.05
-

2
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
E
1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
9
0
1
220V ~ 60Hz
0.73
0.68
0.15
0.16
220V ~ 60Hz
0.65
0.59
0.13
0.14
-

2
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
l
)

F
l
o
o
r

s
t
a
n
d
i
n
g
-
2

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
F
W
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
F
W
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
P
G
F
0
0
0
Z
0
0
6
220V ~ 60Hz
0.27
0.27
0.05
0.05
220V ~ 60Hz
0.18
0.18
0.03
0.03
220V ~ 60Hz
0.17
0.17
0.02
0.02
-

3
0

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
m
)

O
u
t
d
o
o
r

a
i
r

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

(
F
D
U
-
F
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
5
0
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
,

8
5
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
3
0
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
8
0
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
3
0
3
220V ~ 60Hz
0.38
0.38
2.00
2.00
220V ~ 60Hz
0.32
0.32
1.70
1.70
220V ~ 60Hz
0.18
0.18
1.05
1.05
220V ~ 60Hz
0.13
0.13
0.70
0.70
8.5
510
14.5
870
21.5
1290
30
1800
-

3
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
3
.
2

E
x
t
e
r
i
o
r

d
i
m
e
n
s
i
o
n
s
(
a
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
4

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
D
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

7
1
K
X
E
6
D
B
P
J
F
0
0
0
Z
0
5
1
-

3
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
9
0
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
6
0
K
X
E
6
D
B
P
J
F
0
0
0
Z
0
5
2
-

3
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
b
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
4

w
a
y

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
C
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
C
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
A
0
0
3
Z
3
3
9
-

3
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
c
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
2

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
W
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
W
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
P
J
B
0
0
1
Z
6
3
9
-

3
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
d
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
1

w
a
y

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
Q
)
(
1
)

D
i
r
e
c
t

b
l
o
w

t
y
p
e
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
Q
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
D
i
r
e
c
t

b
l
o
w

p
a
n
e
l

(
T
Q
-
P
S
A
-
1
5
W
-
E
)
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
6
-

3
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
Q
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
D
i
r
e
c
t

b
l
o
w

p
a
n
e
l

(
T
Q
-
P
S
B
-
1
5
W
-
E
)
Ducting for outdoor air intake
FDTQ22KXE6D,28KXE6D FDTQ36KXE6D
180
1
8
0
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
7
-

3
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
2
)

D
u
c
t

t
y
p
e
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
Q
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
D
u
c
t

p
a
n
e
l

(
Q
R
-
P
N
A
-
1
4
W
-
E
R
)
180
1
8
0
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
8
-

3
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
Q
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
D
u
c
t

p
a
n
e
l

(
Q
R
-
P
N
B
-
1
4
W
-
E
R
)
180
1
8
0
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
7
9
-

3
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
e
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
1

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
S
)
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
S
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
Ducting for outdoor
air intake
A
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
1
9
3
-

4
0

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
S
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
Ducting for outdoor
air intake
A
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
1
9
4
-

4
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
D D
A
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
2
2
8
(
f
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
H
i
g
h

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
D
-

4
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
g
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
L
o
w
/
M
i
d
d
l
e

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
M
)
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
U
M
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
Ducting for air outlet
Ducting for outdoor
air intake
A
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
2
5
4
-

4
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
Ducting for outdoor
air intake
45KXE6D,56KXE6D
A
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
2
5
5
-

4
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
,

9
0
K
X
E
6
D
Ducting for outdoor
air intake
A
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
2
5
6
-

4
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
Ducting for outdoor
air intake
A
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
2
5
7
-

4
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
h
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

(
t
h
i
n
)
-
L
o
w

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
T
)
1
)
R
e
a
r

a
i
r

r
e
t
u
r
n

t
y
p
e
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
T
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
0
1
-

4
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
T
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
0
2
-

4
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
2
)
B
o
t
t
o
m

a
i
r

r
e
t
u
r
n

t
y
p
e
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
T
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
0
3
-

4
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
T
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
0
4
-

5
0

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
i
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
C
o
m
p
a
c
t

a
n
d

F
l
e
x
i
b
l
e
-
t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
H
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
H
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
1
)

R
e
a
r

a
i
r

r
e
t
u
r
n

t
y
p
e
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
8
3
-

5
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
H
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
2
)

B
o
t
t
o
m

s
u
c
t
i
o
n

t
y
p
e
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
9
2
-

5
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
j
)

W
a
l
l

m
o
u
n
t
e
d

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
K
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
K
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
36,45,56 22,28
B
P
H
A
0
0
0
Z
9
8
1
-

5
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
K
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
H
A
0
0
0
Z
9
8
2
-

5
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
k
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

s
u
s
p
e
n
d
e
d

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
E
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
E
3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
8
2
3
-

5
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
E
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
8
2
4
-

5
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
E
1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
8
2
5
-

5
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
l
)

F
l
o
o
r

s
t
a
n
d
i
n
g
-
2

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
F
W
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
F
W
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
D D
A
P
G
F
0
0
0
Z
0
0
3
-

5
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
or moro
or moro
VP26
Ho!o for w1r1n_
Suspons1on bo!ts
l
D
L
8O
16.886 8l!aro Gas p1p1n_
Dra1n p1p1n_
L1qu1d p1p1n_
A
B
Symbo!
9.628 8l!aro
O o n t o n t
M1O
!nspoot1on ho!o 6OOX6OO
O
Tho modo! namo !abo! 1s attaohod on tho s1do
Notos
p!ato of tho oontro! box s1do.
Suspons1on bo!ts p1toh
S
u
s
p
o
n
s
1
o
n

b
o
!
t
s

p
1
t
o
h
G !nspoot1on ho!o 9OOX98O

Romoto oontro!!orOpt1on
Oontro! box
Ho!os for sorows
|Duot d1mons1on)
|Duot d1mons1on)
|
D
u
o
t

d
1
m
o
n
s
1
o
n
)
Ho!os for sorows
Outdoor a1r duot A1r supp!y
Top surfaoo
or moro
Sorv1oo
spaoo
!nsta!!at1on
spaoo
!
n
s
t
a
!
!
a
t
1
o
n
s
p
a
o
o
P1p1n_ spaoo
or moro
o
r

m
o
r
o
o
r

m
o
r
o
S!ub
Oo1!1n_
Sorv1oo spaoo from s1do Sorv1oo spaoo from !owor
or moro
Bottom surfaso
18
6
O
6
O
26
8
2
O
8
O
O
2
O
O
11O 2JO
188 188
6
6
4OO
86 J6O 86
68O
1
O
6
9OO
1OO
6O
9
O
O
4OO
1OO
1OO
8
6
8
6
18
1
8
1
8
8
1
8
8
1
8
2
6
O
9
4
O
8
6
O
2OO 18
2
6
9
2
1
O
6
8O
8
O
8
1
O
26 61O
88O
18
2
6
4
4
18
J
J
18
11O
118 4OO
6OO
118
11O
2OO
19 12O
6O
2
6
O
|
D
u
o
t

d
1
m
o
n
s
1
o
n
)
1
8
1
8
8
1
8
1
8
8
9
6
J94
8
9
O
suspons1on bo!t
Han_or p!ato for
Un1tmm
l
Top v1ow
G
O
lront v1ow
A B
12M6
D
L
12M6
Space for installation and service
(
m
)

O
u
t
d
o
o
r

a
i
r

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

(
F
D
U
-
F
)
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
U
5
0
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
A
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
2
7
5
-

5
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
U
8
5
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
Tho modo! namo !abo! 1s attaohod on tho s1do
Notos
p!ato of tho oontro! box s1do.
Ho!o for w1r1n_
Suspons1on bo!ts
l
D
L
Gas p1p1n_
Dra1n p1p1n_
L1qu1d p1p1n_
A
B
Symbo! O o n t o n t
!nspoot1on ho!o
O
G
!nspoot1on ho!o
Ho!os for sorows
|Duot d1mons1on)
Top surfaoo
Bottom surfaso
Ho!os for sorows
|Duot d1mons1on)
|
D
u
o
t

d
1
m
o
n
s
1
o
n
)
or moro
or moro
or moro
Sorv1oo
spaoo
spaoo
!
n
s
t
a
!
!
a
t
1
o
n
s
p
a
o
o
P1p1n_ spaoo
or moro
o
r

m
o
r
o
S!ub
Oo1!1n_
Sorv1oo spaoo from s1do Sorv1oo spaoo from !owor
!nsta!!at1on
or moro
A1r supp!y Outdoor a1r duot
S
u
s
p
o
n
s
1
o
n

b
o
!
t
s

p
1
t
o
h
VP26
8O
16.886 8l!aro
9.628 8l!aro
M1O
6OOX6OO
9OOX186O
88O
J94
61O
11O
68O
8
O
2
6
O
1
8
8
8
6
O
8
1
O
1
8
8 18
168
1OO
6O
6
6
1
8
9OO
18
1OO
6O
6O
8
6
8
6
9
O
O
1OO
4OO
11OO
8OO
2OO
2
O
O
1
O
6
2JO
1
8
1
8
2
O
1
2
J
O
9
4
26
1
1
O 2
6
8O
18
2
6
1
8
8
2OO
86O
4OO
1J6
6O
4
4
288
18
J
J 1
8
288
1J6
18
1
2
O
O
19 12O
26
6
O
1
8
1
8
8
18
6
O
9
6
suspons1on bo!t
Han_or p!ato for
Oontro! box
Um1tmm
o
r

m
o
r
o
8
O
O
l
G
O
16M6
A B
12M6
D
L
Top v1ow
lront v1ow
2
6
O
|
D
u
o
t

d
1
m
o
n
s
1
o
n
)
A
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
2
7
6
-

6
0

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
1
3
0
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
8
0
0
F
K
X
E
6
D
o
r

m
o
r
o
l
l
G
O
tho s1do p!ato of tho oontro! box s1do.
Noto1Tho modo! namo !abo! 1s attaohod on
A
B
D
L
or moro
or moro
o
r

m
o
r
o
or moro or moro
Top surfaoo
Bottom surfaso
2
O
O
8
O
O
9
6
J94
68O
61O
11O 1
8
8
2
6
O
8
1
O
8
O
8
6
O
86
18
168
Sorv1oo spaoo from s1do
1
8
6
6
9OO
16OO
168
8
6
9
O
O
8
6
4OO
1OO
P1p1n_ spaoo
6O
6X2OO=12OO
9OO
P!ano v1ow 1OO
2OO
Oo1!1n_
1
O
6
S!ab
86
18
lront v1ow
2JO
1
8
1
8
8
1
6
9
O
1
6
4
O
2
6
1
O
O
8
O
26 8O
2
6
18
4
4
1
8
8
2
6
O
6X2OO=12OO
146O
188
6O
6O
18 18
6O
188
1
8
J
J
2OO
1
6
J
O
6
O
26 2OM6
12O
1
8
1
8
8
19
6
O
18
88O
!nspoot1on ho!o 6OOX6OO
L1qu1d p1p1n_ B
Dra1n p1p1n_
Ho!o for w1r1n_
Suspons1on bo!ts
D
L
l
O VP26
M1O
Oontont
Gas p1p1n_
Symbo!
A 19.O684Braz1n_
9.6288Braz1n_
Duot d1mons1on
D
u
o
t

d
1
m
o
n
s
1
o
n
A1r supp!y
S
u
s
p
o
n
s
1
o
n

b
o
!
t
s

p
1
t
o
h

Oontro! box Outdoor a1r duot
Duot d1mons1on
D
u
o
t

d
1
m
o
n
s
1
o
n
Sorv1oo spaoo from !owor

Sorv1oo
spaoo
Modo! lDU18OOlKXL6D lDU18OOlKXL6D
22.22J8Braz1n_
8O
!nspoot1on ho!o 9OOX1J8O G
Ho!os for sorows
2OM6
Ho!os for sorows
suspons1on bo!t
Han_or p!ato for
Sorv1oo
spaoo
Un1tmm
A
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
2
7
7
-

6
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
2
)

R
e
m
o
t
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
a
r
t
s
)

W
i
r
e
d

r
e
m
o
t
e

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

(
M
o
d
e
l

:

R
C
-
E
4
)
P
J
Z
0
0
0
Z
2
7
4
-

6
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
3
.
3

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
a
l

w
i
r
i
n
g
(
a
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
4

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
P
J
F
0
0
0
Z
1
9
1
-

6
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
b
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
4

w
a
y

C
o
m
p
a
c
t

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
C
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
d
e
l
s
A
P
J
A
0
0
3
Z
3
4
1
-

6
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
c
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
2

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
W
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
T
W
2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
P
J
B
0
0
1
Z
6
4
2
-

6
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
d
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
1

w
a
y

c
o
m
p
a
c
t

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
Q
)
(
1
)

D
i
r
e
c
t

b
l
o
w

t
y
p
e
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
8
0
-

6
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
2
)

D
u
c
t

t
y
p
e
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
8
1
-

6
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
e
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

c
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
-
1

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
T
S
)
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
S
4
5
K
X
E
6
D
B
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
1
9
5
-

6
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
T
S
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
B
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
1
9
6
-

6
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
C
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
2
3
0
(
f
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
H
i
g
h

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
D
-

7
0

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
g
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
L
o
w
/
M
i
d
d
l
e

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
M
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

7
1
K
X
E
6
D
,

9
0
K
X
E
6
D
C
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
2
5
8
-

7
1

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
U
M
1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
C
P
J
R
0
0
2
Z
2
5
9
-

7
2

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
h
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d

(
t
h
i
n
)
-
L
o
w

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
T
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
A
P
J
M
0
0
0
Z
0
0
9
-

7
3

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
i
)

D
u
c
t

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
-
C
o
m
p
a
c
t

a
n
d

F
l
e
x
i
b
l
e

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
U
H
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
P
J
C
0
0
1
Z
2
8
4
-

7
4

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
j
)

W
a
l
l

m
o
u
n
t
e
d

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
K
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
K
2
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

2
8
K
X
E
6
D
,

3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
P
H
A
0
0
1
Z
0
2
9
-

7
5

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l

F
D
K
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
P
H
A
0
0
1
Z
0
3
0
-

7
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
k
)

C
e
i
l
i
n
g

s
u
s
p
e
n
d
e
d

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
E
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
E
3
6
K
X
E
6
D
,

4
5
K
X
E
6
D
,

5
6
K
X
E
6
D
C
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
8
2
6
-

7
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
E
7
1
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
1
2
K
X
E
6
D
,

1
4
0
K
X
E
6
D
C
P
F
A
0
0
3
Z
8
2
7
-

7
8

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
l
)

F
l
o
o
r

s
t
a
n
d
i
n
g
-
2

w
a
y

t
y
p
e

(
F
D
F
W
)
M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
A
P
G
F
0
0
0
Z
0
0
4
-

7
9

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(
m
)

O
u
t
d
o
o
r

a
i
r

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

(
F
D
U
-
F
)

M
o
d
e
l
s

A
l
l

m
o
d
e
l
s
TB1
RD
ON!
62
ONl2
ONl2
62lL
8
62lH
8
J J
Oontro!POB
SW2
SW6
SW6 X6
X1
X2
X8
1 9 J 8 6
O L M UH H
8
1
22OV6OHz
ONWO
lL
62
lH
Ol !
SW4 SW8
SW1
ONM8
8 8
6
6
BL
ONU
WH
lS
LLD8
LLD2
N
L
M
1
! lM
SWJ
Supor!1nk sparo
JSL1
ONK2
XR1
XR2
XR8
XR4
Opt1ona!
1
2
8
4
6
6
12
ONT
Oporat1on
Hoat1n_
Thormo ON
!nspoot1on
1 2
Tho
t
TB2 A B
X Y
X Y
1 8
ONK1 ONB
2OS
SVH
SVG
SVL
1
2
8
4
6
12
ONT2
Th R1 Th! A Th R2
t t
1 2 8 4
ONN
Th R8
6 6 1 2
t t
ONH
! ! !
ONW1 ONW2
18V 28V
1 2 8 4 6 6
ONA
M
SM
l18.16A
l28.16A
Oonnootor for branoh1n_
oontro!!or of hoat rooovory
8p1po systoms
YGN
Larth
l4
ONl8
ONl2
ONl8
ONl8
XB1
XB2
XB8
XB4
2OOV
Tr!
Powor
souroo
!1no
WH WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH WH
W
H
W
H
B
R
B
K
B
L
R
D
W
H
W
H
W
H
W
H
W
H
W
H
Y O
R
B
L
B
R
R
D
6 or 6 w1ros
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
K
B
K
R
D
R
D
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
K
G
R
G
R
B
K
B
K
B
K
R
D
B
K
B
K
B
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
R
RD RD
Powor souroo
Powor souroo !1no
botwoon 1ndoor un1ts
Y
OR
Y
OR
YWH
BL
RD
BK
RD Y BK
BL
RD
ORWH
B
K
B
L
R
D
l88.16A
lor hoat rooovory
8p1po systoms
XR6Romoto oporat1on 1nput
vo!tfroo oontaot
Romoto oontro!!or
S1_na! !1no
Sh1o!dod oord
S1_na! !1no
botwoon 1ndoor un1ts.
P P
8.16A
W
H
R
D
Notos 1. 1nd1oatos w1r1n_ on s1to.
2. Uso tw1n ooro oab!oO.J61.26mm at s1_na! !1no botwoon 1ndoor un1t
2
and outdoor un1t, and s1_na! !1no botwoon 1ndoor un1ts.
2
8. Uso tw1n ooro oab!oO.8mm at romoto oontro!!or !1no. Soo spoo shoot
of romoto oontro!!or 1n oaso that tho tota! !on_th 1s moro than 1OOm.
4. Do not put s1_na! !1no and romoto oontro!!or !1no a!on_s1do powor souroo !1no.
Oo!or Marks
Mark Oo!or
BK
BL
BR
GR
B!aok
B!uo
Brown
Gray
OR Oran_o
RD Rod
WH Wh1to
Y Yo!!ow
YGN Yo!!owGroon
Stopp1n_ motorfor o!ootron1o oxpans1on
va!vo
P1nk P
lS
lan motorw1th thormostat lM!
Ol Oapao1tor for lM !
l!oat sw1toh
luso l14
ONAZ Oonnootor
JSL1 L1vo supor!1nk torm1na! sott1n_for sparo
!
SM
SW1
SW2
SW8
!ndoor un1t addross ` tons p!aoo
!nd1oat1on !ampGroon Norma! oporat1on
LLD8
LLD2
!nd1oat1on !ampRod1nspoot1on
!ndoor un1t addross ` onos p!aoo
Outdoor un1t addross ` tons p!aoo
SW4 Outdoor un1t addross ` onos p!aoo
SW61
SW6
Automat1o ad]ustmontl1xod prov1ous
Modo! oapao1ty sott1n_
torm1na! b!ookPowor souroo TB1
SW62
SWJ1 Oporat1on ohook, Dra1n motor tost run
TB2
vors1on of Supor!1nk protooo!
!ndoor un1t addross ` hundrods p!aoo
torm1na! b!ookS1_na! !1no
mark
mark
62lL,lH L!ootroma_not1o oontaotor for lM
mark
!
Th R1,2,8
Transformor
Thorm1storRomoto oontro!!or
Tr
Tho
X18,6
O!osodond oonnootor
!
Th A !
!
Ro!ay for lM
Thorm1storRoturn a1r
Thorm1storHoat oxohan_or
B
P
J
D
0
0
1
Z
2
7
8
-
80
-
'10 KX-DB-147
3.4 Noise level
Note (1) The data are based on the following conditions.
Ambient air tempetature: Indoor unit 27C DB, 19C WB. Outdoor unit 35C DB
(2) The data in the chart are measuted in an unechonic room.
(3) The noise levels measured in the eld are usually higher than the data because of reection.
(a) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT)
Mike position as right
1.5m
Mike (center & low points)
Models FDT28KXE6D,36KXE6D,45KXE6D
Noise level 37 dB (A) at P-HIGH
31 dB (A) at MEDIUM
30 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
33 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDT56KXE6D
31 dB (A) at MEDIUM
30 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
33 dB (A) at HIGH
Models FDT90KXE6D,112KXE6D
37 dB (A) at MEDIUM
35 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
40 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDT140KXE6D
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
42 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDT71KXE6D
31 dB (A) at MEDIUM
30 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
33 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDT160KXE6D
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
38 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
43 dB (A) at HIGH
(b) Ceiling cassette-4 way compact type (FDTC)
Note (1) Value in are for the heating mode.
1.5m
Model FDTC22KXE6D
Noise level 4444dB (A) at P-HIGH
3333dB (A) at MEDIUM
3032dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
3535dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDTC28KXE6D
3032dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
3535dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDTC36KXE6D
3134dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
3838dB (A) at HIGH
-
81
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDTC45KXE6D
3134dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
4040dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDTC56KXE6D
3134dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
4545dB (A) at HIGH
(c) Ceiling cassette-2 way type (FDTW)
Mike position as below
1.5m
Models FDTW28KXE6D, 45KXE6D, 56KXE6D
39 dB (A) at HIGH
34 dB (A) at MEDIUM
32 dB (A) at LOW
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
d
B
)

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2

x

1
0
-
5
P
a
)
N30
N40
N
20
N50
N60
N70
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
20
30
40
50
60
70
20
30
40
50
60
70
Models FDTQ22KXE6D,28KXE6D
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
33 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
41 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDTQ36KXE6D
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
33 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
41 dB (A) at HIGH
1.5m
(d) Ceiling cassette-1 way compact type (FDTQ)
(e) Ceiling cassette-1 way type (FDTS)
1.5m
Model FDTS45KXE6D
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
43 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDTS71KXE6D
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
44 dB (A) at HIGH
-
82
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(f) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU)
1.5m
Power level
(Measurement conditions: JIS-B8616,
measurement location: reverberation chamber)
(Unit: dB)
Outlet side
75
76
Inlet side
64
65
MODEL
FDU224KXE6D
FDU280KXE6D
Note (1) Values are for external static pressure of 200Pa
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
d
B
)

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2

x

1
0
-
5
P
a
)
N60
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
N50
N40
N30
N20
40
50
10
20
30
60
40
50
10
20
30
60
N
1
0
Model FDU224KXE6D
Noise level 51 dB (A) at HIGH

S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
d
B
)

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2

x

1
0
-
5
P
a
)
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU280KXE6D

1.5m
(g) Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure type (FDUM)
Model FDUM22KXE6D
31 dB (A) at MEDIUM
28 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
33 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDUM140KXE6D
36 dB (A) at MEDIUM
33 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
38 dB (A) at HIGH
Models FDUM28KXE6D,36KXE6D
31 dB (A) at MEDIUM
28 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
34 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDUM71KXE6D
32 dB (A) at MEDIUM
29 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
35 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDUM90KXE6D
33 dB (A) at MEDIUM
30 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
36 dB (A) at HIGH
32 dB (A) at MEDIUM
29 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
35 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDUM112KXE6D
35 dB (A) at MEDIUM
32 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
37 dB (A) at HIGH
-
83
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Models FDUT22KXE6D,28KXE6D
(1) Rear air return
Mike position : 1.5m bwlow the unit
24 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
26 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT56KXE6D
31 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
34 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT36KXE6D
28 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
31 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT45KXE6D
28 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
32 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Mike position : 1.5m in front and 1m below of the air supply duct
30 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
34 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT56KXE6D
37 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT36KXE6D
33 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
35 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT45KXE6D
34 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Measured based on JIS B 8616 ANNEX3 (Duct setting)
1m
Unit
Supply duct Return duct
2m
1m
1
m
1.5m
1m
Unit
Supply duct Return duct
2m
Air
Air
(h) Duct connected (thin)-Low static pressure type (FDUT)
-
84
-
'10 KX-DB-147
32 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
36 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT56KXE6D
43 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
45 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT36KXE6D
37 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT45KXE6D
36 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Mike position : 1.5m in front and 1m below of the air supply duct
31 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
35 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT56KXE6D
40 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
42 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT36KXE6D
36 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
39 dB (A) at MEDIUM
Model FDUT45KXE6D
35 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
40 dB (A) at MEDIUM
1.5m
Unit
Supply duct
Air
2m
Unit
Supply duct
2m
1m
1
m
Air
-
85
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(i) Duct connected-Compact and Flexible type (FDUH)
1.5m
Models FDUH22KXE6D,28KXE6D
30 dB (A) at MEDIUM
27 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
33 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDUH36KXE6D
30 dB (A) at MEDIUM
27 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
L
e
v
e
l
(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
33 dB (A) at HIGH
(j) Wall mounted type (FDK)
1m
Unit
Mike
(Center & low points)
1
m
Models FDK22KXE6D,28KXE6D
3131dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
3535dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDK36KXE6D
3131dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
4139dB (A) at HIGH
cooling heating
Model FDK56KXE6D
3737dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
4646dB (A) at HIGH
cooling heating
Model FDK71KXE6D
3939dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
4747dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDK45KXE6D
3333dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
4242dB (A) at HIGH
cooling heating
-
86
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Models FDE36KXE6D,45KXE6D,56KXE6D
38 dB (A) at MEDIUM
36 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
39 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDE140KXE6D
44 dB (A) at MEDIUM
43 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
46 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDE71KXE6D
39 dB (A) at MEDIUM
37 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
41 dB (A) at HIGH
Model FDE112KXE6D
41 dB (A) at MEDIUM
39 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
44 dB (A) at HIGH
(k) Ceiling suspended type (FDE)
1m
Mike (front & low point)
1m
Unit
Model FDFW28KXE6D
34 dB (A) at MEDIUM
30 dB (A) at LOW
Model FDFW 45KXE6D
36 dB (A) at MEDIUM
33 dB (A) at LOW
(l) Floor standing-2 way type (FDFW)
1m
Mike (front & at low point)
1m
Indoor unit
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
10
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
x
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
Model FDFW56KXE6D
37 dB (A) at MEDIUM
33 dB (A) at LOW
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
x
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
S
o
u
u
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

(
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

2
x
1
0
-
5
P
a
)
-
87
-
'10 KX-DB-147
1.5m
Unit
Mike
(at center & below unit)
Measured based on JIS-B 8616
(m) Outdoor Air Processing unit (FDU-F)
(1) Standard (Factory setting)
Note (1) Values are for external static pressure of 200Pa.
Model FDU500FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU850FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU1300FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU1800FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Outlet side Inlet side Outlet side Inlet side
Power level (Measurement conditions : JIS-B8616,measurement location : reverberation chamber)
68
71
57
60
MODEL
FDU500FKXE6D
FDU850FKXE6D
(Unit: dB)
73
74
62
63
MODEL
FDU1300FKXE6D
FDU1800FKXE6D
(2) When the controller kit is used (Option : U-FCRB)
Model FDU500FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU850FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU1300FKXE6D
N60
40
50
40
50
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10
20
30
10
20
30
N50
N40
N30
N20
60 60
N
1
0
Model FDU1800FKXE6D
Outlet side Inlet side Outlet side Inlet side
63
66
52
55
MODEL
FDU500FKXE6D
FDU850FKXE6D
(Unit: dB)
73
74
62
63
MODEL
FDU1300FKXE6D
FDU1800FKXE6D
Power level (Measurement conditions : JIS-B8616,measurement location : reverberation chamber)
Note (1) Values are for external static pressure of 100Pa. (Models FDU1300, 1800FKXE6D : 200Pa)
-
88
-
'10 KX-DB-147
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Models FDTQ22KXE6D,28KXE6D,36KXE6D
0
10
20
30
40
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Air flow (m
3
/min)
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
H
i
g
h
P
-
H
i
g
h
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
3.5 Characteristics of fan
(a) Ceiling cassette-1 way compact type (FDTQ)
(Only when FDTQ22, 28 and 36 model are used for the Duct panel)
(b) Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure (FDUM)
External static pressure table
How to interpret the blower characteristics table
Example : Case of FDUM71KXE6D
Model
Duct specs.
1 spot closing Standard Square duct
Air flow
(m
3
/min)
10
12
14
18
20
28
34
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
75
75
90
100
105
105
105
Unit : Pa
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Notes(1) 1 spot closing: Round duct flange at center is removed and shield with a
special panel (option).
(2) Standard: 200 duct are installed at all blowout holes.
(3) Square duct: All round ducts are removed and replaced with special
square duct flanges (option).
-
-
-
85
80
90
90
FDUM22
FDUM28,36
FDUM45,56
FDUM71
FDUM90
FDUM112
FDUM140
2-spot blowout
Internal static pressure increases more than
the standard 3-spot blowout.Approx.
14Pa at 17m
3
/min
Square duct blowout
Internal static pressure decreases more than
the standard round duct (200 3-spot).
3Pa at 17m
3
/min. (External static
pressure increases in reverse.)
(1) (2) (3)
20 16 18 13 14
40
20
0
-10
-20
Square duct blower intermalresistance.
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
[
Standard
]
3-spot blower internal resistance
-
89
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDUM22KXE6D
Air flow(m
3
/min)
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20
8 10 12
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
P
-
H
i
g
h
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
Square duct blower
internal resistance
Air flow(m
3
/min)
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20
10 12 14
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
[Standard]
2-spot blower
internal resistance
M
e
d
i
u
m
Square duct blower
internal resistance
[Standard]
2-spot blower
internal resistance
P
-
H
i
g
h
H
i
g
h
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
M
e
d
i
u
m
L
o
w
Model FDUM71KXE6D
20 16 18 13 14
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Air flow(m
3
/min)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-10
-20
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
P
-
H
i
g
h
[
Standard
]
100
120
80
60
40
20
0
-10
10 12 14 15.5
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
U
p
p
e
r
l
i
m
i
t
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
P
-
H
i
g
h
[Standard]
Air flow (m
3
/min)
-
90
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDUM112KXE6D
34 31 25 28 21
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Air flow (m
3
/min)
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
H
i
g
h
P
-
H
i
g
h
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-10
Square duct blower intermalresistance
[
Standard
]
Model FDUM90KXE6D
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
P
-
H
i
g
h
23 17 20 14
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Air flow(m
3
/min)
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-10
Square duct blower intermalresistance .
[
Standard
]
Model FDUM140KXE6D
38 34 30 26 24
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Air flow (m
3
/min)
U
p
p
e
r
l
i
m
i
t
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
P
-
H
i
g
h
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-10
Square duct blower intermalresistance
[
Standard
]
-
91
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(c) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU)
Note 1) Factory default setting of fan speed is [STANDARD] which has standard static pressure.
If high static pressure setting is requied, change setting to [HIGH SPEED 1] whit remote controller on site.
(Regarding the setting method, refer to the user
,
s manual of remote controller for detall)
2) When setting up high static pressure, do not operate the unit under the condition of 60Pa or lower of the external static pressure.
3) The fan speed of this model can be switched between two speeds.
Model FDU224KXE6D
Standard (Factory Settings)
Model FDU280KXE6D
Standard (Factory Settings)
0
45 50 55 60
66
65
50
100
150
200
S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)

Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Standard
Air flow(m
3
/min)
Example
of duct
High
Low
0
60 65 70 75 80 85 88
50
100
150
200
S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)

Example
of duct
High
Low
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Standard
Air flow(m
3
/min)
(d) Duct connected (thin)-Low static pressure type (FDUT)
0
10
20
30
40
4.5 5 6 7 7.5 8 8.3
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Standard
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
5 5.4 6 7 8 9 8.5 9.4
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Standard
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Model FDUT36KXE6D
0
10
20
30
40
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
H
i
g
h
M
e
d
i
u
m
L
o
w
-
92
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDUT45KXE6D
10
0
20
30
40
45
50
7.2 8 9 10 11 12 13.2
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Standard
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
H
i
g
h
M
e
d
i
u
m
L
o
w
Model FDUT56KXE6D
10
0
20
30
40
45
50
7.7 8 9 10 11 12 12.513 13.8
Lower
limit
Upper
limit
Standard
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
H
i
g
h M
e
d
i
u
m
L
o
w
(e) Duct connected-Compact and Flexible type (FDUH)
0
10
20
30
40
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Models FDUH22KXE6D,28KXE6D,36KXE6D
H
i
g
h
P
-
H
i
g
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
-
93
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(1) Standard (Factory Settings)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
14.5 15 15.5 16 16.5 17 17.5 18
Model FDU850FKXE6D
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
8.5 9.5 9 10 10.5
160
180
120
140
200
100
20
40
60
80
0
Model FDU500FKXE6D
Lower
limit
Standard
( )
Lower
limit
Standard
( )
(f) Outdoor air processing unit (FDU-F)
22
21.5
24 23 25 26 28 27
160
180
120
140
200
100
20
40
60
80
0
Model FDU1300FKXE6D
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
30 33 32 31 34 35 36 37 38
160
180
120
140
200
100
20
60
80
0
40
Model FDU1800FKXE6D
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Standard
( )
Lower
limit
Standard
( )
-
94
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(2) When the fun controller kit is used (Option : U-FCRB)
Note (1) Number in an open circle in each property chart indicates the volume No. of the fan controller. Volume numbers not described
in the charts are not usable because they are out of the operational ow rate range.
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
14.5 15 15.5 16 16.5 17 17.5 18
Condition of standard rating
rated air Volume : 100Pa
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Lower
limit
Standard
( )
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
FDU850FKXE6D
8.5 9.5 9 10 10.5
160
180
120
140
200
100
20
40
60
80
0
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Standard
(
Lower
limit
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
FDU500FKXE6D
22
21.5
24 23 25 26 28 27
160
180
120
140
200
100
20
40
60
80
0
7
6
5
4
8
30 33 32 31 34 35 36 37 38
160
180
120
140
200
100
20
60
80
0
40
8
7
6
5
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit Air flow (m
3
/min)
Upper
limit
FDU1300FKXE6D FDU1800FKXE6D
Standard
Lower
limit
( )
Standard
Lower
limit
( )
-
95
-
'10 KX-DB-147
3.6 Temperature and velocity distribution
(a) Ceiling cassett-4 way type (FDT)
Models FDT28, 36, 45, 56, 71KXE6D
15
15
18 18
21 21
24 24
1.5 1.5
1.2 1.2
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3
0.3
35
35
32 32
29
29
26
23
26 23
1.5 1.5
1.2 1.2
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
ISD09406
-
96
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDT71KXE6D
1.2
1.5
0.9
0.6
0.3
1.2
1.5
0.9
0.6
0.3
15
15
18 18
21 21
24 24
35
35
32 32
29
29
26
23
26 23
1.5 1.5
1.2 1.2
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
-
97
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Models FDT90, 112, 140, 160KXE6D
15
15
18 18
21 21
24 24
1.5 1.5
1.2 1.2
0.9 0.9
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.3
35
35
32 32
29 29
26
23
26 23
1.5
1.5
1.2
1.2
0.9
0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
-
98
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(b) Ceiling cassette-4 way-compact type (FDTC)
Models FDTC22, 28KXE6D
15 15
18 18
21 21
24 24
0.9
0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3
0.3
35 35
32
32
29 29
26
23
26
23
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
ISD09407
-
99
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDTC36KXE6D
15 15
18
18
21 21
24
24
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3
0.3
35 35
32 32
29
29
26
23
26
23
0.9
0.9
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.3
-
100
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDTC45KXE6D
15 15
18 18
21
21
24
24
0.9
0.9
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.3
35 35
32 32
29
29
26
23
26
23
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3
0.3
-
101
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDTC56KXE6D
15 15
18 18
21 21
24 24
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
35 35
32 32
29 29
26
23
26
23
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
-
102
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Models FDTW28, 45, 56KXE6D
15 15
18 18
21 21
24 24
0.9
1.5 1.5
0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3
0.3
35 35
32 32
29 29
26
23
26
23
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
1.5
1.2 1.2
1.5
ISD09412
-
103
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Models FDTQ22, 28, 36KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
ISD09410
-
104
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDTS45KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26 23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
ISD09413
-
105
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDTS71KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
-
106
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(f) Wall Mounded type (FDK)
Models FDK22, 28KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
ISD09409
-
107
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Models FDK36, 45KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
-
108
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDK56KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5 2.0
2.0
-
109
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDK71KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
-
110
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(g) Ceiling Suspended type (FDE)
Models FDE36, 45, 56KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
ISD09408
-
111
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDE71KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
-
112
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDE112KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
-
113
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDE140KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
-
114
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(h) Floor standing-2 way type (FDFW)
Model FDFW28KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0 0.5
35
32
29 26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
18
15
2.0
35
29
32
26
-
115
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDFW45KXE6D
15
18
21
24
1.5
1.0 0.5
35
32
29 26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
18
2.0
35
29
32
26
15
-
116
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Model FDFW56KXE6D
15
18
21 24
1.51.0
0.5
35
32
29
26
23
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
15
35
29
32
26
-
117
-
'10 KX-DB-147
3.7 Capacity tables
(a) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT)
PJF000Z193
-
118
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
119
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
120
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
121
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
122
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
123
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
124
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
125
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJF000Z193
-
126
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(b) Ceiling cassette-4 way compact type (FDTC)
PJA003Z378
-
127
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJA003Z378
-
128
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJA003Z378
-
129
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJA003Z378
-
130
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJA003Z378
-
131
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJB001Z645
-
132
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJB001Z645
-
133
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJB001Z645
-
134
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z297
-
135
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z297
-
136
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z297
-
137
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z296
-
138
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z296
-
139
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(f) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU)
PJD001Z307
-
140
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(g) Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure type (FDUM)
PJR002Z392
-
141
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
142
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
143
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
144
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
145
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
146
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
147
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
148
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJR002Z392
-
149
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(h) Duct connected (thin)-Low static pressure type (FDUT)
PJM000Z013
-
150
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJM000Z013
-
151
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJM000Z013
-
152
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJM000Z013
-
153
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJM000Z013
-
154
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z298
-
155
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z298
-
156
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJC001Z298
-
157
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA001Z036
-
158
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA001Z036
-
159
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA001Z036
-
160
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA001Z036
-
161
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA001Z036
-
162
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA001Z036
-
163
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PFA003Z903
-
164
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PFA003Z903
-
165
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PFA003Z903
-
166
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PFA003Z903
-
167
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PFA003Z903
-
168
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PFA003Z903
-
169
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PGF000Z007
-
170
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PGF000Z007
-
171
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PGF000Z007
-
172
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(m) Outdoor air processing unit type (FDU-F)
PJD001Z308
-
173
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJD001Z308
-
174
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJD001Z308
-
175
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJD001Z308
-
176
-
'10 KX-DB-147
RANGE OF USAGE & LIMITATIONS

Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
First branch
5
0
m
M
A
X
.

1
8
m
M
A
X
.

1
8
m
M
A
X
.

1
8
m
M
A
X
.

1
8
m
M
A
X
.

1
8
m
(
O
u
t
d
o
o
r

u
n
i
t

i
s

l
o
w
e
r

:

4
0
m
)
5
0
m
M
A
X
.

1
8
m
(
O
u
t
d
o
o
r

u
n
i
t

i
s

l
o
w
e
r

:

4
0
m
)
A
t

t
h
e

m
o
s
t
,

1
3
0
m

o
r

l
e
s
s
A
t

t
h
e

m
o
s
t
,

1
3
0
m

o
r

l
e
s
s
(Lowest indoor unit)
At the most, 90 m or less
40 m or less
(2)
40 m or less
(2)
At the most, 90m or less
(Highest indoor unit)
First branch
(Header)
denotes
Allowable length of refrigerant piping, height difference between indoor and outdoor unit
(1) Branch pipe method (using branch piping)
(2) Header System (Header used)
Note (1) A branch piping system cannot be connected after a header system.
(2) 90m or less (However, difference between the longest and shortest piping : 40m or less)
(3) The indoor unit of 224 or 280 capacity cannot be connected to the header.
System FDC280KXE6M
FDCS280KXE6M
FDC335KXE6M
FDCS335KXE6M
Please see the next page.
1 to 19 unit 1 to 22 unit
1 to 15 unit
Item
Indoor intake air temperature
(Upper, lower limits)
Outdoor air temperature
(Upper, lower limits)
Single direction piping length Actual length : 160m or less, Eguivalent length : 185m or less
Total piping length
Main pipe length
510m or less
130m or less
90m or less (However, difference between the longest and shortest piping : 40m or less)
6 min or more (3 minutes or more from start to stop or 3 minutes or more from stop to start)
3 min or more
Within 10% of rated voltage
50m or less
40m or less
18m or less
Allowable pipe length from the first branching
18m or less Elevation difference between the first branching point and the indoor unit
Number of connected units
Connectable capacity
(1)
FDC224KXE6M
FDCS224KXE6M
112 ~ 336
140 ~ 420 167 ~ 502
Outdoor unit is higher
Outdoor unit is lower
Indoor units
that can be
used in
combination
Difference in
height between
indoor and outdoor
units
Difference in the elevation of indoor units in a system
Indoor unit atmosphere (behind ceiling)
temperature and humidity
Only models FDT, FDTC, FDTW, FDTS, FDTQ,
FDU, FDUM, FDUH
1 cycle time
Stop time
Voltage fluctuation
Phase unbalance
Compressor
stop/start
frequency
Power source
voltage
Voltage drop during start
Dew point temperature 28 or less, relative humidity 80% or less
(FDE, FDK : Dew point temperature 23 or less, relative humidity 80% or less)
Note (1) If one or more indoor units of FDK, FDFL, FDFU and/or FDFW seris are connected to the system, the total connecting capacity of indoor
units should not exceed 130%.
(2) If superlink I (previous superlink) is selected, all the range of usage and limitations, not only the limitations of connectable indoor capacity
and connectable number of indoor unit but also of the piping length, operating temperature range and etc., become same as those of KX4
(See technical manual '07 - KX - KXR-T-114). In addition to above limitations, all of new functions for KX6 such as automatic address
setting function for multiple refrigerant systems and etc. will be cancelled.
-
177
-
'10 KX-DB-147
43
40
35
30
25
20
0
-5
-15
26
24
27
25
20
15
10
-15 -20 -25 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
14 16 18 20 22
Applicable range
Outdoor air W.B. temperature C W.B.
Indoor air W.B. temperature C W.B.
H
e
a
t
i
n
g

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
I
n
d
o
o
r

a
i
r

D
.
B
.
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C

D
.
B
.
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
d
o
o
r

a
i
r

D
.
B
.
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C

D
.
B
.
CAUTION Cooling operation under low outdoor air temperature conditions
KXE6 models can be operated in cooling mode at low outdoor air temperature condition within above temperature range. However
in case of severely low temperature conditions if the following precaution is not observed, it may not be operated in spite of operable
temperature range mentioned above and cooling capacity may not be established under certain conditions.
[Precaution]
In case of severely low temperature condition
1) Install the outdoor unit at the place where strong wind cannot blow directly into the outdoor unit.
2) If there is no installation place where can prevent strong wind from directly blowing into the outdoor unit, prepare a windbreak
fence or something like that locally in order to divert the strong wind from the outdoor unit.
[Reason]
Under the low outdoor air temperature conditions of -5 or lower, if strong wind directly blow into the outdoor unit, the outdoor heat
exchanger temperature will drop, even though the outdoor fan is stopped by outdoor fan control. This makes high and low pressures
to drop as well. This low pressure drop makes the indoor heat exchanger temperature to drop and will activate anti-frost control at
indoor heat exchanger at frequent intervals, that cooling operation may not be established for any given time.
Note (1) A branch piping system cannot be connected after a header system.
(2) 90m or less (However, difference between the longest and shortest piping : 40m or less)
(3) The indoor unit of 224 or 280 capacity cannot be connected to the header.
(3) Mixed System (Branch piping and Header used)
MAX.90m
(2)
MAX.90m
(2)
MAX.130m
(Header)
(
O
u
t
d
o
o
r

u
n
i
t

i
s

l
o
w
e
r
:

4
0
m
)
5
0
m
First branch
M
A
X
.
1
8
m
M
A
X
.
1
8
m
M
A
X
.
1
8
m
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
MAX.40m
(2)
Operating temperature range
-
178
-
'10 KX-DB-147
SELECTION CHART
(1) Equipment selection ow
Indoor unit
capacity (tentative)
Indoor Load
Total indoor unit
capacity System Capacity
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
Select an indoor unit that matches the indoor load (tentative).
Calculate the total indoor unit capacity.
Indoor unit
capacity Indoor Load
Equipment selection complete.
Change the outdoor unit.
Calculate the temperature compensation,
then calculate the indoor unit capacity.
(See item (2) (a) for the calculation method.)
Calculate temperature compensation and piping
compensation, etc., then calculate the outdoor unit
capacity. (See item (2) (b) for the calculation method.)
Select the outdoor unit (tentative).
Calculate the system capacity
(See item (2) (c) for the calculation method.)
Calculate the indoor unit capacity.
(See item (2) (d) for the calculation method.)
Calculate the load for each room separately, then determine the indoor load.
Change the indoor unit.
-
179
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(2) Capacity calculation method
(a) Calculating the indoor unit capacity compensation
Indoor unit capacity (cooling, heating) = Indoor unit total rated capacity
Capacity compensation coefcient according to temperature conditions
See item (3) (a) concerning the capacity compensation coefcient according to temperature conditions.
(b) Calculating the outdoor unit capacity compensation
Outdoor Unit Capacity (Cooling, Heating) = Outdoor unit rated capacity (rated capacity when 100% connected)
Capacity compensation coefcient according to temperature conditions
Capacity compensation coefcient according to piping length
Capacity compensation coefcient according to height difference
Correction of heating capacity in relation to the frost on the outdoor unit
heat exchanger
Capacity compensation coefficient according to indoor unit connection
capacity
See item (3) (a) concerning the capacity compensation coefcient according to temperature conditions.
See item (3) (c) concerning the capacity compensation coefcient according to piping length.
See item (3) (d) concerning the capacity compensation coefcient according to height difference. This compensation
should be carried out only in cases where the outdoor unit is lower during cooling and higher during heating.
See item (3) (e) correction of heating capacity in relation to the frost on the outdoor unit heat exchanger. This compen-
sation should be carried out only when calculating the heating capacity.
See item (3) (f) concerning the capacity compensation coefcient according to indoor unit connected capacity. This
compensation should be carried out only in cases where the indoor unit total capacity is 100% or higher.
(c) Calculating system capacity
Compare the capacities determined in items (a) and (b) above and let the smaller value be the system capacity (cooling,
heating).
In cases where indoor unit total capacity (cooling, heating) > outdoor unit capacity (cooling, heating)
System capacity (cooling, heating) = Outdoor unit capacity (cooling, heating)
In cases where indoor unit total capacity (cooling, heating) < outdoor unit capacity (cooling, heating)
System capacity (cooling, heating) = Indoor unit capacity (cooling, heating)
(d) Calculating indoor unit capacity [item (c) 1 only]
Indoor unit capacity (cooling, heating) = System capacity (cooling, heating)
[(Indoor unit capacity) / (Indoor unit total capacity)]
Capacity calculation examples

Example 1
Cooling (when the indoor unit connected total capacity is less than 100%)
Outdoor unit FDC224KXE6M .................................................... 1 Unit
Indoor unit FDT56KXE6D ......................................................... 3 Units
Piping length .............................................................................. 60 m (Equivalent length)
Indoor, outdoor unit height difference ........................................ 15 m (Outdoor unit is lower)
Temperature conditions .............................................................. Outdoor temperature: 33C DB
Temperature conditions ............................................................... Indoor temperature: 19C WB
<Indoor unit total cooling capacity>: Item (2) (a) calculation.
Indoor unit rated cooling capacity: 5.6 kW
Capacity compensation coefcient according to temperature conditions:
1.02 (Calculated according to Indoor 19C WB / Outdoor 33C DB); (See page 181)
Indoor unit cooling capacity: 5.6 kW 1.02
.
=.

5.7 kW
Indoor unit total cooling capacity calculation;
indoor unit total cooling capacity: 5.7 kW 3 units =

17.1 kW
<Outdoor unit maximum cooling capacity> : Item (2) (b) calculation
Outdoor unit rated cooling capacity: 22.4 kW
Outdoor unit cooling capacity: 22.4 kW 1.02
.
=.

22.8 kW
Capacity compensation coefcient according to piping length: 0.92 (calculated according to 60 m length); (See page 183)
22.8 kW 0.92
.
=.

21.0 kW
-
180
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Capacity compensation coefcient according to height difference: 0.97 (calculated according to 15 m difference); (See page 184)
21.0 kW 0.97
.
=.

20.4 kW
Capacity compensation coefcient according to indoor unit connected total capacity: 1.0 (56 3) / 224 < 100%)
No compensation
<System cooling capacity>: Item (2) (c) calculation
Compare the indoor unit total cooling capacity and the outdoor unit maximum cooling capacity. The smaller value is the actual
system cooling capacity.
Indoor unit total cooling capacity: 17.1 kW
Outdoor unit maximum cooling capacity: 20.4 kW

E System cooling capacity: 17.1 kW
<Indoor unit capacity compensation> No compensation (5.7 kW)
Example 2
Cooling (when the indoor unit connected total capacity is 100% or higher)
Indoor, outdoor unit height difference ........................................ 15 m (Outdoor unit is higher)
Temperature conditions .............................................................. Outdoor temperature: 35C DB
Temperature conditions ............................................................... Indoor temperature: 18C WB
<Indoor unit total cooling capacity>: Item (2) (a) calculation.
Indoor unit rated cooling capacity: 5.6 kW
Indoor unit cooling capacity: 5.6 kW 0.95
.
=. 5.3 kW
Indoor unit total cooling capacity calculation;
indoor unit total cooling capacity: 5.3 kW 5 units
.
=. 26.5 kW
<Outdoor unit maximum cooling capacity> : Item (2) (b) calculation
Outdoor unit rated cooling capacity: 22.4 kW
Outdoor unit cooling capacity: 22.4 kW 0.95
.
=.

21.3 kW
21.3 kW 0.92
.
=.

19.6 kW
Capacity compensation coefcient according to height difference: 1.0 (the outdoor unit is higher during cooling)
No compensation
Capacity compensation coefcient according to indoor unit connected total capacity: 1.08 (56 5) / 224
.
=.

125%) (See page 184)
19.6 kW 1.08
.
=.

21.2 kW
<System cooling capacity>: Item (2) (c) calculation
Compare the indoor unit total cooling capacity and the outdoor unit maximum cooling capacity. The smaller value is the actual
system cooling capacity.
Indoor unit total cooling capacity : 26.5 kW
Outdoor unit maximum cooling capacity : 21.2 kW

E System cooling capacity: 21.2 kW
<Indoor unit cooling capacity Compensation>: Item (2) (d) calculation.
21.2 kW 5.3 kW
4.2 kW
26.5 kW
Example 3
Heating (when the indoor unit connected total capacity is 100% or higher)
Indoor, outdoor unit height difference ........................................ 20 m (Outdoor unit is higher)
Temperature conditions .............................................................. Outdoor temperature: 6C WB
Temperature conditions ............................................................... Indoor temperature: 19C DB
<Indoor unit total heating capacity>: Item (2) (a) calculation.
Indoor unit rated heating capacity: 6.3 kW
Capacity compensation coefcient according to temprature conditions:
1.04 (Calculated according to Outdoor 6C WB / Indoor 19C DB); (See page 182)
Indoor unit heating capacity: 6.3 kW 1.04
.
=.

6.6 kW
Indoor unit total heating capacity calculation;
indoor unit total heating capacity: 6.6 kW 5 units
.
=.

33.0 kW
.
=.
-
181
-
'10 KX-DB-147
<Outdoor unit maximum heating capacity> : Item (2) (b) calculation
Outdoor unit rated heating capacity: 25.0 kW
1.04 (Calculated according to Outdoor 6C WB / Indoor 19C DB); (See page 182)
Outdoor unit heating capacity: 25.0 kW 1.04 = 26.0 kW
26.0 kW 0.982
.
=.

25.5 kW
Capacity compensation coefcient according to height difference: 0.96 (calculated according to 20 m difference); (See page 184)
25.5 kW 0.96
.
=.

24.5 kW
Correction of heating capacity in relation to the frost on the outdoor unit heat exchanger:
1.0 (calculated according to 6C WB); (See page 184)
24.5 kW 1.0
.
=.

24.5 kW.
Capacity compensation coefcient according to indoor unit connected total capacity: 1.0 (56 5) / 224
.
=.

125%) (See page 184)
24.5 kW 1.0
.
=.

24.5 kW.
<System heating capacity>: Item (2) (c) calculation
Compare the indoor unit total heating capacity and the outdoor unit maximum heating capacity. The smaller value is the actual
system heating capacity.
Indoor unit total heating capacity : 33.0 kW
Outdoor unit maximum heating capacity : 24.5 kW

E System heating capacity: 24.5 kW
<Indoor unit heating capacity compensation> (Item (2) (d) calculation
24.5 kW 6.6 kW
4.9 kW
33.0 kW
.
=.
(3) Capacity compensation coefcient
(a) Capacity compensation coefcient and power consumption compensation coefcient according to in-
door and outdoor temperature conditions.
1) Capacity compensation coefcient
4Cooling
Indoor air W.B. temperature 14CWB
Outdoor air D.B. temperature (CDB)
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
n
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.15
1.20
1.25
1.30
1.35
1.40
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
Note (1) The above-mentioned table shows a typical condition among conditions to occur via controlling an air-conditioning equipment.
(2) When performing the cooling operation with the outdoor air temperature being -5C or under, a windbreak fence must be
installed.
-
182
-
'10 KX-DB-147
2) Power consumption correction factor
Outdoor air W.B. temperature -20CWB Outdoor air W.B. temperature -15CWB
Outdoor air W.B. temperature -10CWB
Outdoor air W.B. temperature 2CWB
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
16
4Heating
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.15
1.20
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Indoor air D.B. temperature(CDB)
Indoor air W.B. temperature 14CWB Indoor air W.B. temperature 15CWB
P
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
s
u
m
p
t
i
o
n

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
4Cooling
0.50
Outdoor air D.B. temperature(CDB)
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.15
1.20
1.25
1.25
-
183
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Outdoorair W.B. temperature 18CWB
Outdoor air W.B.
temperature -15CWB
Outdoor air W.B.
temperature 10CWB
Outdoor air W.B. temperature 14CWB Outdoor air W.B. temperature -20CWB
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Indoor air D.B. temperature(CDB)
P
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
s
u
m
p
t
i
o
n

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
0.70
0.75
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.15
1.20
1.25
4Heating
(c) Correction of cooling and heating capacity in relation to one way length of refrigerant piping.
(Note) This table is for reference only. If the refrigerant piping one way equivalent after the rst branch is extended longer than 40 m, it could
drop further by about 10% in the worst case.
1) Cooling
Liquid line:9.52
Gas line:19.05
Liquid line:12.7
Gas line:22.22
0
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
20 40 60 80 90 100 120 140 160 180
Models : FDC224KXE6M, FDCS224KXE6M
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
0
0.90
0.92
0.96
0.94
0.98
1.00
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
All models
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Refrigerant piping one way equivalent length (m)
Liquid line:9.52
Gas line:22.22
Liquid line:12.7
Gas line:25.4
0
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
20 40 90 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Refrigerant piping one way equivalent length (m) Refrigerant piping one way equivalent length (m)
Liquid line:12.7
Gas line:25.4
Liquid line:12.7
Gas line:28.58
0.80
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Refrigerant piping one way equivalent length (m)
2) Heatling
-
184
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(e) Correction of heating capacity in relation to the frost on the outdoor unit heat exchanger
(d) When the outdoor unit is located at a lower height than the indoor unit in cooling operation and when the
outdoor unit is located at a higher height than the indoor unit in heating operation, the following values
should be subtracted from the values in the above table.
The correction factors will change drastically according to weather conditions. So necessary adjustment should be
made empirically according to the weather data of the particular area.
Note (1) Equivalent piping length can be obtained by calculating as follows.
Equivalent piping length = Real gas piping length + Number of bends in gas piping sEquivalent piping length of bends.
Equivalent length of each joint
F12.7
0.20
F9.52
0.15
F15.88
0.25
F19.05
0.30
F22.22
0.35
F25.4
0.40
F28.58
0.45
F31.8
0.55
Unit : m/one part
Height difference between the indoor unit and
outdoor unit in the vertical height difference
Adjustment coefficient
15 m
0.97
10 m
0.98
5 m
0.99
20 m
0.96
25 m
0.95
30 m
0.94
Height difference between the indoor unit and
outdoor unit in the vertical height difference
45 m
0.91
40 m
0.92
35 m
0.93
50 m
0.90
(f) The capacity compensation coefficient and power consumption compensation coefficient vary
according to the total capacity of concurrently operating indoor units, as shown below.

-11
0.95
-13
0.96
-20
0.96
-15
0.96
-9
0.94
-7
0.93
-5
0.91
-3
0.88
-1
0.86
1
0.87
3
0.92
5 or more
1
Outdoor air C W.B
temperature
(Note) This table shows typical values.
Cooling
Capacity compensation coefficient
Models : FDC224KXE6M, 280KXE6M, FDCS224KXE6M, 280KXE6M
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
P
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
s
u
m
p
t
i
o
n
c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Total capacity of concurrently operating indoor units (%)
Heating
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Power consumption compensation coefficient
Cooling
P
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
s
u
m
p
t
i
o
n
c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Heating
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 20 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 20 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
(Note) If the connecting capacity of the indoor unit exceeds 130%, consider the connecting capacity as 130%.
-
185
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Cooling
Capacity compensation coefficient
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
P
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
s
u
m
p
t
i
o
n
c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Heating
C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Power consumption compensation coefficient
Cooling
P
o
w
e
r

c
o
n
s
u
m
p
t
i
o
n
c
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
Heating
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 20 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 20 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 40 60 80 100 120
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
(Note) If the connecting capacity of the indoor unit exceeds 130%, consider the connecting capacity as 130%.
-

1
8
6

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7

P
I
P
I
N
G

S
Y
S
T
E
M
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
M
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
M
,

F
D
C
S
2
2
4
K
X
E
6
M
,

2
8
0
K
X
E
6
M
Pressure switch setting value
Solenoid valve operation
Name Setting value
High pressure switch (63H1-1)
[For protection]
4.15 open/3.15 close (MPa)
Name Control content
SV6
SV1
At inverter accumulator start : Open
During under-dome temperature control : Open
During discharge temperature control : Open
Thermistor (Tho-D1)
Thermistor (Tho-A)
Thermistor (Tho-R1, R2)
Thermistor (Tho-S)
Thermistor (Tho-SC)
Thermistor (Tho-H)
Thermistor (Tho-C1)
: For control of discharge pipe temperature
: For heating and cooling to low outdoor temp., for control of defrosting
: For control of defrosting
: For control of suction pipe temperature
: Sub-cooling coil control during cooling
: Under-dome temperature control
Function of thermistor
Low pressure sensor (PSL)
High pressure sensor (PSH)
Thermistor (ThI-R1,R2)
(ThI-R3)
: Compressor control
Protection
0.18 ON/0.236 OFF (MPa)
Error
0.134 ON/0.18 OFF (MPa)
Protection
Cooling : 3.70 ON (MPa)
Heating : 3.00 ON (MPa)
: Heating operation : Indoor fan control
Cooling operation : Frost prevention
Superheat control
: Cooling superheat control
Gas piping
Check valve
4-way switching solenoid
Service valve
Service valve Liquid piping
9.52
Stepping motor
(for electronic expansion valve)
Stepping motor
To next unit by turn
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Sub-cooling coil Sub-cooling coil
Thermistor (Outlet)
(ThI-R3)
Thermistor (Return air)
(ThI-A)
(Tho-SC)
(EEVSC)
(Tho-C1)
(Tho-D1)
(63H1-1)
(PSH)
SV1
Thermistor (Inlet)
(ThI-R2)
Thermistor (Outlet)
(ThI-R3)
(ThI-A)
Thermistor (Inlet)
(ThI-R2)
Thermistor (Heat exchanger)
(ThI-R1)
(ThI-R1)
Oil
separator
Outdoor unit
Strainer
Strainer
Receiver
Super-cooling coil Thermistor 1
Sub-cooling coil
Super-cooling coil expansion valve
Fusible
plug
Under-dome thermistor
SV6
Capillary
tube
Discharge pipe Thermistor
(PSL)
Low pressure sensor
(THo-S)
Suction pipe thermistor
High pressure switch
Check joint
High pressure sensor
Capillary tube
(Tho-H)
Solenoid valve (oil return)
Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
Check
joint
(Tho-A)
(Tho-R1)
Heat exchanger Thermistor 1
(Tho-R2)
External air Thermistor
A
c
c
u
m
u
l
a
t
o
r
Strainer
224: 19.05
280: 22.22
H
e
a
t

e
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
r
H
e
a
t

e
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
r
Heating expansion valve
(EEVH)
Strainer
Strainer
Cooling Heating
Indoor unit A
Indoor unit B
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
o
r

(Liguid injection return)
Solinoid valve
( )
-

1
8
7

-
'
1
0
K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
M
o
d
e
l
s

F
D
C
3
3
5
K
X
E
6
M
,

F
D
C
S
3
3
5
K
X
E
6
M
Pressure switch setting value
Solenoid valve operation
Name Setting value
High pressure switch (63H1-1)
[For protection]
4.15 open/3.15 close (MPa)
Name Control content
SV6
SV1
At inverter accumulator start : Open
During under-dome temperature control : Open
During discharge temperature control : Open
Thermistor (Tho-D1)
Thermistor (Tho-A)
Thermistor (Tho-R1,R2)
Thermistor (Tho-S)
Thermistor (Tho-SC)
Thermistor (Tho-H)
Thermistor (Tho-C1)
: For control of discharge pipe temperature
: For heating and cooling to low outdoor temp., for control of defrosting
: For control of defrosting
: For control of suction pipe temperature
: Under-dome temperature control
Function of thermistor
Low pressure sensor (PSL)
High pressure sensor (PSH)
Thermistor (ThI-R1,R2)
(ThI-R3)
Protection
0.18 ON/0.236 OFF (MPa)
Error
0.134 ON/0.18 OFF (MPa)
Protection
Cooling : 3.70 ON (MPa)
Heating : 3.00 ON (MPa)
: Heating operation : Indoor fan control
Cooling operation : Frost prevention
Superheat control
: Cooling superheat control
Gas piping
25.4
Check valve
Service valve
Service valve
Liquid piping
12.7
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
To next unit by turn
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Sub-cooling coil Sub-cooling coil
Thermistor (Outlet)
(ThI-R3)
(ThI-A)
(Tho-SC)
(EEVSC)
(Tho-C1)
(Tho-D1)
(63H1-1)
(PSH)
Thermistor (Inlet)
(ThI-R2)
Thermistor (Outlet)
(ThI-R3)
(ThI-A)
Thermistor (Inlet)
(ThI-R2)
(ThI-R1)
(ThI-R1)
Oil
separator
Outdoor unit
Strainer
Strainer
Receiver
Sub-cooling coil
Fusible
plug
Capillary
tube
Discharge pipe Thermistor
(PSL)
Low pressure sensor
(THo-S)
High pressure switch
Check joint
High pressure sensor
Capillary tube
(Tho-H)
Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
Check
joint
(Tho-R1)
(Tho-R2)
A
c
c
u
m
u
l
a
t
o
r
Strainer
H
e
a
t

e
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
r
H
e
a
t

e
x
c
h
a
n
g
e
r
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
o
r

Heating expansion valve
(EEVH)
Strainer
Strainer
Strainer
Cooling Heating
Indoor unit A
Indoor unit B
SV6
(Liguid injection return)
Solinoid valve
Under-dome thermistor
4-way switching solenoid
SV1
SV11
Suction pipe Thermistor
Super-cooling coil expansion valve
(Tho-A)
External air Thermistor
-
188
-
'10 KX-DB-147
APPLICATION DATA
7.1 Installation of indoor unit
A PJF012D016
-
189
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(a) Ceiling cassette-4way type (FDT)
A PJF012D016
-
190
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
191
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
192
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Indoor Unit
Ceiling surface
Level gauge
(inserted into the unit)
Ceiling opening
dimensions
20
+4
0
Keep the distance between 20~24mm.
Exceeding the range of distance
may cause failure etc.
Before installation
Removing the air return grille
Accessories
Follow installation manual carefully, and install the panel properly.
Check the following items.
Accessories
Accessories holding position
Note: Accessories are laid in the position removing the corner panel.
1.
2.
Removing a corner panel
Corner panel
Orientation of the panel installation
Control box
Refrigerant pipes Drain pipe
Caution
WARNING
Bolt
Strap
4 pieces
4 pieces
For panel installation
For avoiding the corner panel from falling
Checking the indoor unit installation position
for details.) Attaching the panel
<Removal>
Stopper
Pull the corner panel toward the direction indicated by
the arrow and remove it. (Same way for all four
corner panels)
Take note that there is an orientation to install the panel.
Attach the panel with the orientation shown on the right.
CAUTION
PIPE SIDE
DRAIN
PANEL INSTALLATION MANUAL
Read this manual together with the indoor units installation manual.
Electrical wiring
Units hook
Panels xing hanger
Hook
hanger
Screws of
Panel switch
control box cover
Connector for louver motor (white) Clamps of unit main body
To Panel switch
CNV (red)
Attaching the panel
1. Temporary attaching
Lift up the hanger (2 places) on the panel for temporary support.
Hang the panel on the hook on the indoor unit.
2. Fix the panel on the indoor unit
Fasten the panel on the indoor unit with the four bolts supplied with the panel.
Caution
Improperly tightened hanging bolts can cause the
problems listed below, so make sure that you have
tightened them securely.
Air leakage
Air leakage along
the ceiling
Fouling
Dew condensation or dripping Make sure no gap is left here.
Caution
Pipe Side Drain
PIPE SIDE DRAIN
Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply
unexpected stress on the terminal.
Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or re.
Make sure the power supply is turned off when electric wiring work.
Otherwise, electric shock, malfunction and improper running may occur.
Read this manual together with the air conditioner installation manual carefully.
Check if the opening size for the indoor unit is correct with the level gauge supplied in the indoor unit.
Check if the gap between the ceiling plane and the indoor unit is correct by inserting the level gauge into the air
outlet port of the indoor unit. (See below drawing)
Adjust the installation elevation if necessary.
If there is a height difference beyond the design limit
between the installation level of the indoor unit and the
ceiling plane, the panel may be subject to excessive
stress during installation, it may cause distortion and
damage.
Align the PIPE SIDE mark (on the panel) with the
refrigerant pipes on the indoor unit.
Align the DRAIN mark (on the panel) with the drain
pipe on the indoor unit.
In case the orientation of the panel is
not correct, it will lead to air leakage
and also it is not possible to connect
the louver motor wiring.
If there is a gap remaining between the ceiling
and the decorative panel even after the
hanging bolts are tightened, adjust the
installation level of the indoor unit again.
It is possible to adjust the installation height of the indoor unit with the panel attached as long
as there is no infuence on the drain pipe inclination and/or the indoor unit levelness.
To adjust nely, please turn a nut fastening the indoor unit
using a spanner or similar tool from the opening on the corner.
Make sure there is no stress given on the panel when adjusting the height of the indoor
unit to avoid unexpected distortion. It may cause the distortion of panel or failing to
close the air return grille.
PJF012D003A A
The installation level of the indoor unit can be adjusted fnely
from the opening provided on the corner, even after panel is attached.
(Refer to
Hold the stoppers on the air return grille (2 places) toward
OPEN direction, open the air return grille.
Remove the hooks of the air return grille from the decorative
panel while it is in the open position.
1. After removing three screws of control box, detach the cover of control box (the hatched part).
2. Connect the connector for louver motor (white 20P).
Hold the wiring by using the clamps of the indoor unit.
Hold the connector inside the control box.
3. Connect the connector for panel switch.
Hold the wiring by using the clamps of the indoor unit.
Connect CNV (red) inside the control box.
CAUTION
If the air return grill is opened, the
panel switch is turned off so that the
air-conditioner cannot be operated any
more.
To start the air conditioner, close the
air return grill.
A PJF012D003A
-
193
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Horizontal 0
43
Vertical airfow direction
Dimension L (mm)
Downwards 45
26
It can be set between 26~43mm freely.
A
a
If it is necessary to fx the louver position manually, follow the procedure mentioned below.
1. Shut off the main power switch.
2.
3.
Attaching a corner panel
Louver motor
Louver
Louver motor Connector
<Range of louver setting>
Caution
Attaching the air return grille
To attach the air return grille, follow the procedure described in in the reverse order.
1.
2.
Removing the air return grille
<Installation>
Closing direction
Position for hanging hinges
Caution
Attaching the air return grille from the hinge side.

Be careful in air return grille attaching, unstable attaching may cause grille falling.
Repair or replace the distorted, broken stopper at once, or the grille falling may occur.
1 Stop the air conditioner and press SET
button and LOUVER button simultaneously
for three seconds or more.

2 Press S or T button.(selection of indoor unit)
[EXAMPLE]

3 Press SET button. ( determination of
indoor unit)
[EXAMPLE]

4 Press S or T button. (selection of louver No.)
[EXAMPLE]

5 Press SET button. (Determination of
louver No.)
[EXAMPLE] If No.1 louver is selected,
current upper limit position
6 Press S or T
S T
button. (selection of upper limit
position)
(the most horizotal)

(the most downwards)
(return to the default setting)
No. 4
No. 2
No. 1 No. 3
b
l
o
r
t
n
o
C
o
x
Louver No.
It is possible to change the movable range of the louver on the air outlet from the wired remote controller. Once the top and bottom position
is set, the louver will swing within the range between the top and the bottom when swing operation is chosen. It is also possible to apply
different setting to each louver.
NOTICE
(downwards)
(horizontal)
the position of the louver 7 Press SET button (Fixing of the upper
limit position)
[EXAMPLE]
8 Press or button (Selection of lower limit
position)

9 Press SET button (Fixing of the lower limit
position)
[Example]
(displayed for two seconds)
10Press button.
ATTENTION
Lower
position
Movable
range
Upper
position
When plural remote controllers are connected, louver setting operation cannot be set by slave remote controller.
Caution
1. To avoid unexpected falling of the corner panel, put the strap onto the corner panels pin with turning the strap up.
2. Then hang the strap of a corner panel onto the decorative panels pin.
3. First insert the part a of a corner panel into the part A of the decorative panel, and then engage four hooks.
Pin
Pin
For FDT type, in case the louver No to be set is uncertain, set any louver
temporarily. The louver will swing once when the setting is completed and it
is possible to confrm the louver No and the position.
After that, choose the correct louver No and set the top and bottom
position.
The louver No. to be set is confrmed and the display shows the upper limit of the movable range.
position -- is to return to the factory setting. If you need to
change the setting to the default setting, use position --.
(shows current setting)
How to set the airow direction
After the setting is completed, the louver which was set moves
from the original position to the lower limit position, and goes
back to the original position again. (This operation is not
performed if the indoor unit and/or indoor unit fan is in operation.)
Upper limit position and lower limit position are fxed, and the set
positions are displayed for two seconds, then setting is completed.
If the upper limit position number and the lower limit position number are set to the same position, the louver is fxed at that
position auto swing does not funtion.
If you press RESET button during settings, the display will return to previous display. If you press
button during settings, the mode will be ended and return to original display, and the settings that have not been
completed will become invalid.
Unplug the connector of the louver motor which you want to fx the position. Make sure to insulate unplugged
connectors electrically with a vinyl tape.
Adjust the louver position slowly by hand so as to be within the applicable range mentioned below table.
Any automatic control or operation from the remote controller will be disabled on the louver whose
position is fxed in the above way.
Do not set a louver beyond the specifed range. Failure to observe this instruction may result in
dripping, dew condensation, the fouling of the ceiling and the malfunctioning of the unit.
Piping side Drain hose side
Select the lower limit position of louver.

position 1 is the most horizontal, and position 6 is the most
downwards.
position -- is to return to the factory setting. If you need to
change the setting to the default setting, use position --.
The upper limit position is fxed and the setting position is
displayed for two seconds. Then proceed to lower limit position
selection display.
Select the upper limit of louver movable range.
position1 is the most horizontal, and position 6 is the most
downward.
(the most horizontal)
Louver adjusting mode ends and returns to the original display.
Hang the hooks of the air return grille in the hole of the panel. (The hooks of the grille can be hanged in three side
of the panel as following.)
After the grille is hanged, close the grille while the stoppers on the grille (2 places) are kept pressed to OPEN
direction. When the grille comes to the original position, release the stoppers to hold the grille. Make sure to hear the
sound of CLICK in both stoppers.
Control box
Panel switch
The grill may be
installed at one of
these three sides.
The grill cannot be
installed at this side.
Select the indoor unit of which the louver is set.
Select the louver No. to be set according to the right fgure.
Selected indoor unit is fxed.
The following is displayed if the number of the indoor units
connected to the remote controller is one. Go to step 4.
The following is displayed if the number of the indoor units
connected to the remote controller are more than one
This function is not able to be set with wireless remote controls or simple remote control (RCH-H3).
For setting the swing range of other louvers, return to 1 and proceed same procedure respectively.
-
194
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Before installation
z Install correctly according to the installation manual.
z Conrm the following points:
cUnit type/Power supply specication cPipes/Wires/Small parts cAccessory items
Accessory itme
For unit hanging For refrigerant pipe For draom pipe
Flat washer
(M10)
Level gauge
(Insulation)
Pipe cover(big)
Pipe cover
(small)
Strap Pipe cover(big) Pipe cover(small) Drain hose Hose clamp
8 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 1
For unit hanging
For adjustment
in hoisting in the
unit's main body
For heat
insulation
of gas pipe
For heat
insulation
of liquid tube
For pipe cover
xing
For heat
insulation
of drain socket
For heat
insulation
of drain socket
For drain pipe
connecting
For drain hose
mounting
Selection of installation location for the indoor unit
1Select the suitable areas to install the unit under approval of the user.
x Areas where the indoor unit can deliver hot and cold wind sufciently. Suggest to the user to use
a circulator if the ceiling height is over 3m to avoid warm air being accumulated on the ceiling.
x Areas where there is enough space to install and service.
x Areas where it can be drained properly. Areas where drain pipe descending slope can be taken.
x Areas where there is no obstruction of airow on both air return grille and air supply port.
x Areas where re alarm will not be accidentally activated by the air conditioner.
x Areas where the supply air does not short-circuit.
x Areas where it is not inuenced by draft air.
x Areas not exposed to direct sunlight.
x Areas where dew point is lower than around 28C and relative humidity is lower than 80%.
This indoor unit is tested under the condition of JIS (Japan Industrial Standard) high humidity
condition and conrmed there is no problem. However, there is some risk of condensation drop
if the air conditioner is operated under the severer condition than mentioned above.
If there is a possibility to use it under such a condition, attach additional insulation of 10 to
20mm thick for entire surface of indoor unit, refrigeration pipe and drain pipe.
x Areas where TV and radio stays away more than 1m. (It could cause jamming and noise.)
x Areas where any items which will be damaged by getting wet are not placed such as food, table
wares, server, or medical equipment under the unit.
x Areas where there is no inuence by the heat which cookware generates.
x Areas where not exposed to oil mist, powder and/or steam directly such as above fryer.
x Areas where lighting device such as uorescent light or incandescent light doesnt affect the
operation.
(A beam from lighting device sometimes affects the infrared receiver for the wireless remote
controller and the air conditioner might not work properly.)
2Check if the place where the air conditioner is installed can hold the weight of the unit. If it is not
able to hold, reinforce the structure with boards and beams strong enough to hold it. If the strength
is not enough, it could cause injury due to unit falling.
3If there are 2 units of wireless type, keep them away for more than 5m to avoid malfunction due to
cross communication.
4When plural indoor units are installed nearby, keep them away for more than 4m.
z When it is not possible to keep enough space between indoor unit and wall or between indoor units,
close the air supply port where it is not possible to keep space and conrm there is no short circuit
of airow.
z Install the indoor unit at a height of more than 2.5m above the oor.
t i n u r o o d n I t i n u r o o d n I
Wall
Ceiling
surface
Decorative panel
1000mm or more
4000mm or more
1000mm or more
2500mm or more
Obstacle
Floor
Preparation before installation
z If suspension bolt becomes longer, do reinforcement of earthquake resistant.
cFor grid ceiling
When suspension bolt length is over 500mm, or the gap between the ceiling and roof is over
700mm, apply earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
cIn case the unit is hanged directly from the slab and is installed on the ceiling plane which has
enough strength.
When suspension bolt length is over 1000mm, apply the earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
z Prepare four (4) sets of suspension bolt, nut and spring washer (M10 or M8) on site.
Ceiling opening, Suspension bolts pitch, Pipe position
Installation of indoor unit
Work procedure
1. This units is designed for 2 x 2 grid ceiling.
If necessary, please detach the T bar temporarily before you install it.
If it is installed on a ceiling other than 2 x 2 grid ceiling, provide an inspection port on the control box
side.
2. Arrange the suspension bolt at the right position (530mm530mm).
3. Make sure to use four suspension bolts and x them so as to be able to hold 500N load.
4. Ensure that the lower end of the suspension bolt should be 45mm above the ceiling plane.
Temporarily put the four lower nuts 88mm above the ceiling plane and the upper nuts on distant
place from the lower nuts in order not to obstruct hanging the indoor unit or adjust the indoor unit
position, and then hang the indoor unit.
T bar Ceiling
panel
Control box
5. Adjust the indoor unit position after hanging it by inserting the level gauge attached on the package
into the air supply port and checking if the gap between the ceiling plane and the indoor unit is
appropriate. In order to adjust the indoor unit position, adjust the lower nuts while the upper nuts are
put on distant place. Conrm there is no backlash between the hanger plate for suspension bolt and
the lower nut and washer.
88mm
Suspension bolt
Nut (upper)
Flat washer
Spring washer
Nut (lower)
Ceiling surface
45mm
Refrigerant piping
Drain piping
Level gauge
3
0
3
0
Level gauge
T-bar
Ceiling panel
(insulation)
Use level gauges as
reference, adjust the
bottom to the face of
the indoor unit.
Diffuser
Level gauge
(insulation)
T-bar
Ceiling panel
Use level gauges as
reference, adjust the
bottom to the face of
the indoor unit.
When the ceiling panel comes below the T
bar, align the bottom of the level gauge to
the lower face of the ceiling panel.
Diffuser
Unit
Correct
Unit
Wrong
Touch the nut (lower) and
washer without any play
Play is left between the fixture
and the nut (lower) and washer.
A B C E
F
F
F
D
F
6-4
D
E
C
B
A
Symbol Content
Air outlet opening
for ducting
F
Gas piping
Liquid piping
Drain piping
Hole for wiring
Suspension bolts
Decorative panel
Air supply
Air return
grille
Hanger plate for
suspension bolt
(Installed on site)
Drain hose piece
(Accessory)
Control
box
Holes for
tapping screws
Hole
145
325
570
4
5
o
r m
o
re
1
3
2 1
9
2
3
5
8
8
2
1
0
2
4
8
185
190 223
3
2
6
3
5
0
5
3
0
(
S
u
s
p
e
n
s
io
n

b
o
lt
s

p
it
c
h
)
530 (Suspension bolts pitch)
5
5
6
6
7
200 48
413
700
21
3
5
60
140
100
1
0
0
8
8
1
4
0
(b) Ceiling cassette-4way compact type (FDTC)
PJA012D786
-
195
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Installation of indoor unit (continued)
6. Make sure to install the indoor unit horizontally. Conrm the
levelness of the indoor unit with a level gauge or transparent
hose lled with water. Keep the height difference at both ends of
the indoor unit within 3mm.
7. Tighten four upper nuts and x the unit after height and levelness
adjustment.
Caution
z Do not adjust the height by adjusting upper nuts. It will cause unexpected stress on the indoor unit
and it will lead to deformation of the unit, failure of attaching a panel, and generating noise from the
fan.
z Make sure to install the indoor unit horizontally and set the gap between the unit underside and
the ceiling plane properly. Improper installation may cause air leakage, dew condensation, water
leakage and noise.
z Even after decorative panel attached, still the unit height can be adjusted nely. Refer to the
installation manual for decorative panel for details.
z Make sure there is no gap between decoration panel and ceiling surface, and between decoration
panel and the indoor unit. The gap may cause air leakage, dew condensation and water leakage.
z In case decorative panel is not installed at the same time, or ceiling material is installed after the
unit installed, put the cardboard template for installation attached on the package (packing material
of cardboard box) on the bottom of the unit in order to avoid dust coming into the indoor unit.
Refrigerant pipe
Caution
z Use the new refrigerant pipe.
When re-using the existing pipe system for R22 or R407C, pay attention to the following items.
x Change the are nuts with the attached ones (JIS category 2), and reprocess the are parts.
x Do not use thin-walled pipes.
z Use phosphorus deoxidized copper alloy seamless pipe (C1220T specied in JIS H3300) for
refrigeration pipe installation.
In addition, make sure there is no damage both inside and outside of the pipe, and no harmful
substances such as sulfur, oxide, dust or a contaminant stuck on the pipes.
z Do not use any refrigerant other than R410A.
Using other refrigerant except R410A (R22 etc.) may degrade inside refrigeration oil. And air getting
into refrigeration circuit may cause over-pressure and resultant it may result in bursting, etc.
z Store the copper pipes indoors and seal the both end of them until they are brazed in order to avoid
any dust, dirt or water getting into pipe. Otherwise it will cause degradation of refrigeration oil and
compressor breakdown, etc.
z Use special tools for R410 refrigerant.
Work procedure
1. Remove the are nut and blind anges on the pipe of the indoor unit.
Make sure to loosen the are nut with holding the nut on pipe side with a spanner and giving
torque to the nut with another spanner in order to avoid unexpected stress to the copper pipe,
and then remove them.
(Gas may come out at this time, but it is not abnormal.)
z Pay attention whether the are nut pops out. (as the indoor unit is sometimes pressured.)
2. Make a are on liquid pipe and gas pipe, and connect the refrigeration pipes on the indoor unit.
Bend the pipe with as big radius as possible and do not bend the pipe repeatedly. In addition, do
not twist and crush the pipes.
Do a are connection as follows:
z Make sure to loosen the are nut with holding the nut on pipe side with a spanner and giving
torque to the nut with another spanner in order to avoid unexpected stress to the copper pipe,
and then remove them.
z When fastening the are nut, align the refrigeration pipe with the center of are nut, screw the
nut for 3-4 times by hand and then tighten it by spanner with the specied torque mentioned
in the table below. Make sure to hold the pipe on the indoor unit securely by a spanner when
tightening the nut in order to avoid unexpected stress on the copper pipe.
3. Cover the are connection part of the indoor unit with attached insulation material after a gas
leakage inspection, and tighten both ends with attached straps.
z Make sure to insulate both gas pipes and liquid pipes completely.
Incomplete insulation may cause dew condensation or water dropping.
4. Refrigerant is charged in the outdoor unit.
As for the additional refrigerant charge for the indoor unit and piping, refer to the installation manual
attached to the outdoor unit.
Pipe diameter Tightening torque Nm
6.35 14 to 18
9.52 34 to 42
12.7 49 to 61
15.88 68 to 82
19.05 100 to 120
Drain pipe (continued)
Work procedure
1. Make sure to insert the drain hose (the end mode of soft PVC) to the end of the step part of drain
socket.
Attach the hose clamp to the drain hose around 10mm from the end, and fasten the screw within
5mm left to the nut.
z Do not apply adhesives on this end.

Drain socket
The step part Drain hose
No adhesive allowed
Drain socket
Metal plate
10mm
Hose clamp
Fasten the screw within 5 mm left to the nut.
Drain hose
2. Prepare a joint for connecting VP-20 pipe, adhere and connect the joint to the drain hose (the end
made of rigid PVC), and adhere and connect VP-20 pipe (prepare on site).
As for drain pipe, apply VP-20 made of rigid PVC which is on the market.
z Make sure that the adhesive will not get into the supplied drain hose.
It may cause the exible part broken after the adhesive is dried up and gets rigid.
z Do not bend or make an excess offset on the drain hose as shown in the picture.
Bend or excess offset will cause drain leakage.
Over 20mm
3. Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend and/or
trap in the midway.
z Pay attention not to give stress on the pipe on the indoor unit side, and support and x the pipe
as close place to the unit as possible when connecting the drain pipe.
z Do not set up air vent.
Supporting metal
No bump
No trap
Not touching the water
Trapped air will
generate noises.
Air vent
Insulation material
1.5m ~ 2m
Descending slope greater than 1/100
z When sharing a drain pipe for more than one
unit, lay the main pipe 100mm below the drain
outlet of the unit. In addition, select VP-30 or
bigger size for main drain pipe.
4. Insulate the drain pipe.
z Be sure to insulate the drain socket and rigid PVC pipe installed indoors otherwise it may cause
dew condensation and water leakage.
After drainage test implementation, cover the drain socket part with pipe cover (small size),
then use the pipe cover (big size) to cover the pipe cover (small size), clamps and part of the
drain hose, and x and wrap it with tapes to wrap and make joint part gapless.
Drain up
z The position for drain pipe outlet can be raised up to 600mm above the ceiling. Use elbows for
installation to avoid obstacles inside ceiling. If the horizontal drain pipe is too long before vertical
pipe, the backow of water will increase when the unit is stopped, and it may cause overow of
water from the drain pan on the indoor unit. In order to avoid overow, keep the horizontal pipe
length and offset of the pipe within the limit shown in the gure below.
Drain hose
6
0
0
m
m

o
r

le
s
s
Joint for VP-20
(Prepare on site)
295 to 325mm 100 or less
Drain pipe
Caution
z Install the drain pipe according to the installation manual in order to drain properly.
Imperfection in draining may cause ood indoors and wetting the household goods etc.
z Do not put the drain pipe directly into the ditch where toxic gas such as sulfur, the other harmful and
inammable gas is generated. Toxic gas would ow into the room and it would cause serious
damage to users health and safety (some poisoning or deciency of oxygen). In addition, it may
cause corrosion of heat exchanger and bad smell.
z Connect the pipe securely to avoid water leakage from the joint.
z Insulate the pipe properly to avoid condensation drop.
z Check if the water can ow out properly from both the drain outlet on the indoor unit and the end of
the drain pipe after installation.
z Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend and/or
trap in the midway. In addition, do not put air vent on the drain pipe. Check if water is drained
out properly from the pipe during commissioning. Also, keep sufcient space for inspection and
maintenance.
Indoor unit
hose
Strap (Accessory)
Pipe cover (Accessory)
The thickness of insulation should be 20mm or more.
Pipe cover (small)
(For insulation)
(Accessory)
Unit
pipe cover (big)
(For insulation)
(Accessory)
Joint for VP-20
(Prepare on site)
Drain socket
Connect
VP-20
(Prepare on site)
Pipe cover (small)
(For insulation)
(Prepare on site)
Drain hose
(Accessory)
Clamp
(Accessory
Descending stop greater than 1/100
As wide as possible
(about100mm)
VP-30 or bigger
-
196
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Drain pipe (continued)
Drain test
z After installation of drain pipe, make sure that drain system work in good condition and no water
leakage from joint and drain pan. Check if the motor sound of drain pump is normal or not.
z Do drain test even if installation of heating season.
z For new building cases, make sure to complete the test before
hanging the ceiling.
1. Pour water of about 1000cc into the drain pan in the indoor unit by
pump so as not to get the electrical component wet.
2. Make sure that water is drained out properly and there is no water
leakage from any joints of the drain pipe at the test.
Conrm that the water is properly drained out while the drain motor
is operating. At the drain socket (transparent), it is possible to
check if the water is drained out properly.
3. Unplug the drain plug on the indoor unit to remove remaining water
on the drain pan after the test, and re-plug it. And insulate the drain
pipe properly nally.
Drain pump operation
cIn case electrical wiring work nished
Drain pump can be operated by remote controller (wired).
For the operation method, refer to Operation for drain pump in the installation manual for wiring
work.
cIn case electrical wiring work not nished
Drain pump will run continuously when the dip switchSW7-1 on the indoor unit PCB is turned ON,
the Connector CNB is disconnected, and then the power supply (220-240VAC on the terminal block
[ and ] or [ and ] ) is turned ON.
Make sure to turn OFF SW7-1 and reconnect the Connector CNB after the test.
z Attach the panel on the indoor unit after electrical wiring work.
z Refer to attached manual for panel installation for details.
Wiring-out position and wiring connection
z Electrical installation work must be performed according to the installation manual by an electrical
installation service provider qualied by a power provider of the country, and be executed according
to the technical standards and other regulations applicable to electrical installation in the country.
Be sure to use an exclusive circuit.
z Use specied cord, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cord securely in order
not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal.
z Do not put both power source line and signal line on the same route. It may cause
miscommunication and malfunction.
z Be sure to do D type earth work.
z For the details of electrical wiring work, see attached instruction manual for electrical wiring work.
1. Remove a lid of the control box (1 screws).
2. Hold each wiring inside the unit and fasten them to terminal block securely.
3. Fix the wiring with clamp.
4. Install a lid of the control box back to original place.
Panel installation
z After wiring work nished, install the panel on the indoor unit.
z Refer to panel installation manual for details. (see next page)
Accessory items
1 Hook 1 piece For xing temporarily
2 Chain 2 pieces
3 Bolt 4 pieces For installing the panel
4 Screw 1 piece For attaching a hook
5 Screw 2 pieces For attaching a chain
Check list after installation
z Check the following items after all installation work completed.
Check if Expected trouble Check
The indoor and outdoor units are xed securely? Falling, vibration, noise
Inspection for leakage is done? Insufcient capacity
Insulation work is properly done? Water leakage
Water is drained properly? Water leakage
Supply voltage is same as mentioned in the model name plate? PCB burnt out, not working at all
There is mis-wiring or mis-connection of piping? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Earth wiring is connected properly? Electric shock
Cable size comply with specied size? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Any obstacle blocks airow on air inlet and outlet? Insufcient capacity
Drain plug
Power source side terminal block
Earth
Wiring between indoor
and outdoor unit
Signal side terminal block
Remote controller line
Wiring clamp
Single split (PAC) series
VRF (KX) series
Power source side terminal block
Earth
Indoor power source line
Signal side terminal block
Signal line (shielded cord)
Wiring clamp
Earth (signal line)
T8
T8
T2
T2
-
197
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Caution
[Figure 1]
[Figure 2]
Hook
Screw
PJA012D783
3
0
3
0

Please read this manual together with the indoor units installation manual.
WARNING
Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not
to apply unexpected stress on the terminal.
Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or fire.
Checking the indoor unit installation position
Read this manual together with the air conditioner installation manual carefully.
Check if the gap between the ceiling plane and the indoor unit is correct by inserting the
level gauge into the air outlet port of the indoor unit. (See below drawing)
Adjust the installation elevation if necessary.
Remove the level gauge before you attach the panel.
Unscrew the screw from the corner area, pull the corner panel toward the direction
indicated by the arrow mark.
First insert the part a of a corner panel into the part A of the cover panel, engage two
hooks and tighten the screw.
1. Take note that there is an orientation to install the panel.
Attach the panel with the orientation shown on the below.
Align the PIPE SIDE mark (on the panel) with the refrigerant pipes on the indoor unit.
2. The intake grille can also be attached in a rotated position by 90 degrees.
1. Screw in two bolts out of the four supplied with
the panel by about slightly less than 5mm.
( mark ) [Figure 1]
2. Attach the hook supplied with the panel to the
main body with the hook fixing screw (1 screw).
[Figure 2]
3. Open the intake grille.
4. Please remove the screw of a corner panel and
remove a corner panel. (four places)
5. A panel is hooked on two bolts ( mark ).
[Figure 3]
In case the orientation of the panel is not correct, it will lead to air leakage and also
it is not possible to connect the louver motor wiring.
Orientation of the panel and return air grille installation
Removing a corner panel
Attaching a corner panel
Panel installation
Accessories
Use level gauges
as reference, adjust
the bottom to the
face of the indoor
unit.
Use level gauges
as reference, adjust
the bottom to the
face of the indoor
unit.
When the ceiling panel comes below
the T bar, align the bottom of the level
gauge to the lower face of the ceiling
panel.
Diffuser
Ceiling panel Ceiling panel
Intake grille
Refrigerant
pipes side
Control box
Drain pipe side
Screw
Screw
Hook
Corner
panel
T-bar
T-bar Level gauge
(insulation)
Level gauge
(insulation)
Diffuser
Louver motor
connector
Install the panel on the unit after completing the electrical wiring.
1
2
3
4
5
Hook
Chain
Screw
Screw
Screw
1 piece
2 pieces
4 pieces
1 piece
2 pieces
For fixing temporarily
For hoisting the panel
For attaching a hook
For attaching a chain
[Figure 3]
PJA012D783
-
198
-
'10 KX-DB-147
4
2
1 3

[Figure 5]
[Figure 6]
[Figure 7]
Louver motor connector Drain pump connector
Wire intake
Clamp
Louver motor wiring
Chain
Chain
6. Please rotate a hook, put in the slot on the panel, and carry out fixing the panel
temporarily. [Figure 4]
7. Tighten the two bolts used for fixing the panel temporarily and the other two.
8. Please open the lid of a control box.
9. Like drain pump wiring, please band together by the clamp and put in louver motor wiring
into a control box. [Figure 5]
10. Please connect a louver motor connector. [Figure 5]
11. Attach two chains to the intake grille with two screws. [Figure 6]
12. Replace the corner panels. Please also close a chain with a screw together
then. [Figure 7]
13. Close the intake grill.
Make sure there is no stress given on the panel when adjusting the height of the indoor
unit to avoid unexpected distortion. It may cause the distortion of panel or failing to
close the air return grille.
Any automatic control or operation from the remote controller will be disabled on the louver whose
position is fixed in the above way.
Do not set a louver beyond the specified range. Failure to observe this instruction may result in
dripping, dew condensation, the fouling of the ceiling and the malfunctioning of the unit.
Caution
If the upper limit position number and the lower limit position number are set to the same position, the
louver is fixed at that position auto swing does not function.
Caution
When plural remote controllers are connected, louver setting operation cannot be set by slave remote
controller.
ATTENTION
Louver motor
Connector
<Range of louver setting>
It can be set between 24~40mm freely.
Vertical airflow direction
Dimension L (mm)
Horizontal 23
40
Downwards 50
24
Louver motor
Louver
It is possible to change the movable range of the louver on the air outlet from the wired remote controller. Once the
This function is not able to be set with wireless remote controls or simple remote control (RCH-H3).
top and bottom position is set, the louver will swing within the range between the top and the bottom when swing
operation is chosen. It is also possible to apply different setting to each louver.
If it is necessary to fix the louver position manually, follow the procedure mentioned below.
1. Shut off the main power switch.
2. Unplug the connector of the louver motor which you want to fix the position.
Make sure to insulate unplugged connectors electrically with a vinyl tape.
3. Adjust the louver position slowly by hand so as to be within the applicable range mentioned below table.
Stop the air conditioner and press SET button and
LOUVER button simultaneously for three seconds or more.
The following is displayed if the number of the indoor units connected to the
remote controller is one. Go to step 4.
Press or button. (selection of indoor unit)
Press SET button. (determination of indoor unit)
The following is displayed if the number of the indoor units connected to the
remote controller are more than one
Select the indoor unit of which the louver is set.
Selected indoor unit is fixed.
How to set the airflow direction
1
2
3
L
L
Caution
Caution
Lower
position
Movable
range
Upper
position
Louver No.
Piping
side
Drain
hose side
Control box
(downwards)
(horizontal)
the position of the louver
[EXAMPLE]
Press or button. (selection of louver No.)
Select the louver No. to be set according to the right figure.
4
Press button.
Louver adjusting mode ends and returns to the original display.
10
[EXAMPLE]
Press or button. (selection of upper limit position)
Select the upper limit of louver movable range.
position 1 is the most horizontal, and position 6 is the most downward.
position -- is to return to the factory setting. If you need to change the setting to
the default setting, use position --.
6
Press or button. (Selection of lower limit position)
Select the lower limit position of louver.
position 1 is the most horizontal, and position 6 is the most downwards.
position -- is to return to the factory setting. If you need to change the setting to
the default setting, use position --.
8
[EXAMPLE]
(shows current setting)
Press SET button. (Determination of louver No.)
The louver No. to be set is confirmed and the display shows the
upper limit of the movable range.
5
[EXAMPLE] If No.1 louver is selected,
current upper limit position
Press SET button. (Fixing of the upper limit position)
The upper limit position is fixed and the setting position is displayed for two
seconds. Then proceed to lower limit position selection display.
7
[EXAMPLE]
Press SET button. (Fixing of the lower limit position)
Upper limit position and lower limit position are fixed, and the set positions are
displayed for two seconds, then setting is completed.
After the setting is completed, the louver which was set moves from the
original position to the lower limit position, and goes back to the original
position again. (This operation is not performed if the indoor unit and/or indoor
unit fan is in operation.)
9
[EXAMPLE]
NOTICE
In case the louver No to be set is uncertain,
set any louver temporarily.
The louver will swing once when the setting
is completed and it is possible to confirm
the louver No and the position.
After that, choose the correct louver No and
set the top and bottom position.
Slot
[Figure 4]
Air leakage
Air leakage along
the ceiling
Fouling
Dew condensation or dripping Make sure no gap is left here.
Improperly tightened hanging bolts can
cause the problems listed below, so make
sure that you have tightened them
securely.
If there is a gap remaining between the
ceiling and the decorative panel even
after the hanging bolts are tightened,
adjust the installation level of the indoor
unit again.

If you press RESET button during settings, the display will return to previous display.
If you press button during settings, the mode will be ended and return to original display, and the
settings that have not been completed will become invalid.

For setting the swing range of other louvers, return to 1 and proceed same procedure respectively.
-
199
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(C) Ceiling cassette-2way type (FDTW)
A PJB012D230
-
200
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
201
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
202
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(d) Ceiling cassette-1way compact type (FDTQ)
PJC012D121
-
203
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
204
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
205
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(1) Parts Models : TQ-PSA-15W-E, TQ-PSB-15W-E
PJC012D118
-
206
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Attach 2 of 4 hanging bolts supplied with the panel on the indoor piping side and its
diagonal position respectively, and tighten them gently for 5mm. ( marks)
Open the suction grille, hang the panel onto 2 bolts, and secure it temporarily.
When securing the panel temporarily, hang the panel onto side bolts as shown in
the left figure, then hang onto side while turning it.
Tighten the temporarily secured hanging bolts and other 2 hanging bolts.
Remove 2 screws on the control box, and open the cover.
Connect the connector for louver motor (white 4P) and the connector for limit switch
(white 3P).
The connector on the indoor unit side is in the control box.
After connecting the connectors, pass the wiring on the panel side through wiring
hole. Hold the connector in the control box.
Close control box cover, and tighten 2 screws.
Mount the chain attached with suction grille on the panel using screw. The screws for
mounting chain and hanging bolts are in the same bag.
Close suction grille, then work is completed.
If the louver cannot be moved by remote control operation, cut off the power for over 10
seconds after confirming the connection of connector, then turn on the power again.
Mount the panel 3
Mounting
location for panel
A
A
Panel wiring
Control box cover
Screw
Screw
Connector for
limit switch
(white 3P)
Connector for
louver motor
(white 4P)
Wiring hole
Control
box cover
A Piping
B
Control box
Rotation direction
C
-
207
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(2) Parts Models : QR-PNA-14W-ER, QR-PNB-14W-ER
i PJC012D102
-
208
-
'10 KX-DB-147
0
10
20
30
6 7 8 9 10
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

s
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)
Air flow (m
3
/min)
L
o
w
M
e
d
i
u
m
H
i
g
h
P
-
H
i
g
h
U
p
p
e
r

l
i
m
i
t
-
209
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
210
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(e) Ceiling cassette-1way type (FDTS)
PJC012D016
-
211
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
212
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
213
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJD012D053
(f) Duct connected High static pressure type (FDU)
Models 224, 280, KXE6D
-
214
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
215
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
216
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(g) Duct connected - Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)
A PJR012D319
-
217
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
218
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
219
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(h) Duct connected (thin) - Low static pressure type (FDUT)
B PJM012D032
-
220
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
221
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
222
-
'10 KX-DB-147
a PJC012D207
-
223
-
'10 KX-DB-147
0
10
20
30
5 6 7 8 9
E
x
te
r
n
a
l s
ta
tic
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
(P
a
)
Air flow (m3/min)
H
ig
h
P
-H
ig
h
L
o
w
M
e
d
iu
m
U
pper lim
it
-
224
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
225
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PHA012D039
-
226
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
227
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
228
-
'10 KX-DB-147
A PFA012D621B
-
229
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
230
-
'10 KX-DB-147
*1 This function is not able to be set with wireless remote controls or simple remote control (RCH-H3).
*2 For setting the swing range of other louvers, return to 1 and proceed same procedure respectively.
*1
*2
-
231
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PGF012D004
-
232
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
233
-
*1 This function is not able to be set with wireless remote controls or simple remote control (RCH-H3).
*2 For setting the swing range of other louvers, return to 1 and proceed same procedure respectively.
'10 KX-DB-147
*1
*2
-
234
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(m) Outdoor air processing unit type (FDU-F)
PJD012D059
-
235
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
236
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
237
-
'10 KX-DB-147
7.2 Electrlc wiring work instruction
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK INSTRUCTION
Install an over-current and earth leakage breaker (threshold current: 30mA) specified for
each unit without fail.
Provide a dedicated branching circuit and never share a branching circuit with other
equipment. If shared, disconnection at the circuit breaker may occur, which can cause
secondary damage.
Set earth of D-type.
Connection of a cable beyond 3.5 mm
2
is not permitted. When cables of over 5.5 mm
2
are
in use, provide a dedicated pull box to take a branch to an indoor unit.
Keep "remote controller line" and "power source line" away from each other on constructing
of unit outside.
Run the lines (power source, remote controller and "between indoor and outdoor unit")
upper ceiling through iron pipe or other tube protection to avoid the damage by mouse and
so on.
Do not add cord in the middle of line (of indoor power source, remote controller and signal)
route on outside of unit. If connecting point is flooded, it could cause problem as for electric
or communication.
(In the case that it is necessary to set connecting point on the signal line way, perform
thorough waterproof measurement.)
Do not connect the power source line [220V/240V/380V/415V] to signal side terminal block.
Otherwise, it could cause failure.
Screw the line to terminal block without any looseness, certainly.
Do not turn on the switch of power source, before all of line work is done.
Electrical wiring work must be performed by an electlician an qualified by a
local power provider. These wiring specifications are determined on the
assumption that the following instructions are observed:
Do not use cords other than copper ones.
Do not use any supply line lighter than one specified in parentheses for each type below.
-braided cord (code designation 60245 IEC 51), if allowed in the relevant part 2;
-ordinary tough rubber sheathed cord (code designation 60245 IEC 53);
-flat twin tinsel cord (code designation 60227 IEC 41);
-ordinary polyvinyl chloride sheathed cord (code designation 60227 IEC 53);
Provide a separate power outlet for each outdoor or indoor unit.
All indoor units grouped in one system must have power source that can be turned on or off simultaneously.
Pay extra attention so as not to confuse signal line and power source line connection, because an error in their
connection can be burn all the boards at once.
Connection of the line ("Between indoor and outdoor unit", Earth and Remote controller)
Remove lid of control box before connect the above lines, and connect the lines to terminal block according to
number pointed on label of terminal block.
In addition, pay enough attention to confirm the number to lines, because there is electrical polarity except earth line.
Furthermore, connect earth line to earth position of terminal block of power source.
Install earth leakage breaker on power source line. In addition, select the type of breaker for inverter circuit as
earth leakage breaker.
If the function of selected earth leakage breaker is only for earth-fault protection, hand switch (switch itself and type
"B" fuse) or circuit breaker is required in series with the earth leakage breaker.
Cabling system diagram (Outdoor/indoor unit connection procedure)

Outdoor unit
Power source
Indoor unit1 Indoor unit2
Signal line (between indoor and outdoor units)
Use shielded cord for a signal line and connect earth
(signal line) at all the indoor units and
outdoor units.
Earth
Signal line
(between indoor unit)
Earth
Remote controller
Remote
controller line
Remote
controller line
Power source line specification
Note (1) The cord distances are calculated with a voltage drop of 2%. If the distance should exceed the
above data, review the cord thickness to use in accordance with your extension cord regulations.
(2) When total extension of remote controller line is more than 100m, change the size of cord
according to " Remote Control, Wiring and functions".
In case of Heat recovery 3-pipe systems
Branching controller of heat recovery 3-pipe systems wiring
When this unit is used as a "Heat Recovery 3-pipe Systems", refer to the installation
manual of a branching controller (option).
Address setting is done by (1) Manual address setting or (2) Automatic address setting.
In the case of (2) "Automatic address setting", it is possible to change address setting by wired
remote controller after once complete setting.
As for details of setting procedure, refer to instructions attached to the outdoor unit for details.
Installation and wiring of remote controller
Remote controller
Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical
installer, and use exclusive circuit.
Power source with insufficient capacity and improper work can cause electric shock and fire.
Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal
securely, and hold the cable securely in order not to apply unexpected
stress on the terminal.
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire.
Arrange the electrical wires in the control box properly to prevent them from
rising. Fit the lid of the services panel property.
Improper fitting may cause abnormal heat and fire.
Make sure there is no dust or clogging on both the plug and the socket nor
loose connection of the socket before plugging, and plug in securely to the
end of the blade.
Accumulation of dust, clogging on the socket or plug, or loose installation of the socket could cause
electric shock and fire. Replace the socket if it is loose.
Use the genuine optional parts. And installation should be performed by a
specialist.
If you install the unit by yourself, it could cause water leakage, electric shock and fire.
Do not repair by yourself. And consult with the dealer about repair.
Improper repair may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire.
Consult the dealer or a specialist about removal of the air conditioner.
Improper installation may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire.
Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work.
If the power is supplied during servicing or inspection work, it could cause electric shock and injury by
the operating fan.
Shut off the power before electrical wiring work.
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running.
Perform earth wiring surely.
Do not connect the earth wiring to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod and telephone earth wiring.
Improper earth could cause unit failure and electric shock due to a short circuit.
Make sure to install earth leakage breaker on power source line.
(countermeasure thing to high harmonics.)
Absence of breaker could cause electric shock.
Use the circuit breaker of correct capacity.
Using the incorrect capacity one could cause the system failure and fire.
Do not use any materials other than a fuse of correct capacity where a fuse
should be used.
Connecting the circuit by wire or copper wire could cause unit failure and fire.
Use power source line of correct capacity.
Using incorrect capacity one could cause electric leak, abnormal heat generation and fire.
Do not mingle solid cord and stranded cord on power source and signal side
terminal block.
In addition, do not mingle difference capacity solid or stranded cord.
Inappropriate cord setting could cause loosing screw on terminal block, bad electrical contact, smoke
and fire.
Do not turn off the power source immediately after stopping the operation.
Be sure to wait for more than 5 minutes. Otherwise it could cause water leakage or breakdown.
Do not control the operation with the circuit breaker.
It could cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the fan may start operation unexpectedly and it may
cause injury.
Security instructions
WARNING
CAUTION
Electrical Wiring Connection
Address setting
Do not install it on the following places.
(1) Place exposed to direct sunlight (4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation
(2) Places near heat devices (5) Place exposed to oil mist or steam directly.
(3) High humidity places (6) Uneven surface
Remote Control, Wiring and functions
Install remote controller referring to the attached manual.
Wiring of remote controller should use 0.3mm
2
x2 core wires or cables.
(on-site configuration)
Maximum prolongation of remote control wiring is 600 m.
If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below.
But, wiring in the remote controller case should be under 0.5mm
2
. Change the wire size outside of the case
according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is necessary at the wire connecting section. Be careful about
contact failure.
100-200m..................... 0.5mm
2
2 core
Under 300m ................ 0.75mm
2
2 core
Under 400m ................ 1.25mm
2
2 core
Under 500m ................ 2.0mm
2
2 core
Avoid using multi-core cables to prevent malfunction.
Keep remote controller line away from earth (frame or any metal of building).
Make sure to connect remote controller line to the remote controller and terminal block of
indoor unit. (No polarity)
Electrical wiring work must be performed by an electrician qualified by a local power provider according
to the electrical installation technical standards and interior wiring regulations applicable to the
installation site.
Accord with following items. Otherwise, there will be the risks of electric shock and fire
caused by overheating or short circuit.
Earth leakage breaker
Circuit breaker
Wiring specification
Electrical Wiring Connection (continued)
Unit type Earth leakage breaker
Circuit breaker Wiring size
Switch
breaker
Over-
current
protector
rated
capacity
Power
source
line
Wire
length
Signal line
Remote
controller
line
Earth
line
22-36
15A 30mA 0.1sec 30A 15A
2.0mm
2
2
304m
0.75~
1.25mm
2
2
0.3mm
2
2cores
2.0mm
2
m 6 1 2 0 9 - 5 4
m 9 2 1 0 6 1 - 2 1 1
In case of Duct connected -High static pressure- type
71-140
15A 30mA 0.1sec 30A 15A
2.0mm
2
2
87m 0.75~
1.25mm
2
2
0.3mm
2
2cores
2.0mm
2
m 8 4 0 8 2 , 4 2 2
Specification of each line
Power source line
Signal line (Shielded cord)
2.0~3.5mm
2
0.75~1.25mm
2
0.3~2.0mm
2
PSB012D967
-
238
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Remote Control, Wiring and functions (continued) Trial operation (continued)
When indoor unit address number is displayed on
remote controller, pushing the (MODE)
button to make the indoor unit with that number
blow air (Display example:" ").
Push the (MODE) button again to stop the
operation.
However, this operation is invalid on the
air-conditioning running.
After a unit is energized, it is possible
to display an indoor unit address by
pr essi ng but t on on
the remote control unit.
Press the or button to make
sure that all indoor units connected
are displayed in order.

Control plural indoor units by a single remote controller
A remote controller can control plural indoor units (up to 16)
In above setting, all plural indoor units will operate under same mode and temperature setting.
Connect all indoor units with 2 core remote controller line for group control.
Use the function of manual address setting to set the indoor and outdoor address number.
Do not forget to set the number for the outdoor units.
As shown in the following figure, the remote control can be used to control multiple outdoor
units.
One remote control is able to perform group control for multiple units (maximum 16 units).
Use the rotary SW1 and SW2 provided on the indoor unit PCB (Printed circuit board) to set unique remote control
communication address avoiding duplication.
Outdoor unit
No.01
Outdoor unit
No.02
Indoor unit Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.01
Action time
Indoor unit
Action time
SW1 Master
Action time
SW1 Slave
Switch Setting Contents
Master
Slave
Slave remote
controller
Wired remote controller: SW1
Wireless kit: SW1-2
Master remote
controller
AIR CON NO
Confirming method of indoor units
Master/slave setting when more than one remote control unit are used
A maximum of two remote control units can be connected to one indoor unit (or one group of
indoor units.)
Latest "function setting" is superior than previous one.
Acceptable combination is "two (2) wired remote controllers", "one (1) wired remote controller
and one (1) wireless kit" or "two (2) wireless kits".
Set SW1 to "Slave" for the slave remote control unit. It was factory set to "Master" for shipment.
Note:The setting "Remote control unit sensor enabled" is only selectable with the master
remote control unit in the position where you want to check room temperature.
Checking operation data
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.04
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.02
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.05
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.03
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.06
Trial operation
The method of trial cooling operation
(No polarity)
(No polarity)
Operate the remote control unit as follows.
1. Starting a cooling test run.
Start the system by pressing the button.
Select (Cool) with the (MODE) button.
Press the TEST button for 3 seconds or longer.
The screen display will switch to:
When the (SET) button is pressed while is indicated, a cooling test
run will start.
The screen display will switch to .
2. Ending a cooling test run.
Pressing the button, the (TEMP) button or (MODE) button will end a
cooling test run. (Cooling test run will end after 30 minutes pass.)
shown on the screen will go off.
Operation data can be checked with remote control unit operation.
1. Press the button.
The display change
2. Press the (SET) button while is displayed.
8.When only one indoor unit is connected to remote controller, is displayed
(blinking indication during data loading).
Next, operation data of the indoor unit will be displayed. Skip to step 7.
4. When plural indoor units is connected, the smallest address number of indoor unit among all
connected indoor unit is displayed.
[Example]:
(blinking 1 seconds) blinking.
5. Select the indoor unit number you would like to have data displayed with the button.
6. Determine the indoor unit number with the (SET) button.
(The indoor unit number changes from blinking indication to continuous indication)
(The address of selected indoor unit is blinking for 2 seconds.)
(A blinking indication appears while data loaded.)
Next, the operation data of the indoor unit is indicated.
7. Upon operation of the button, the current operation data is displayed in order from
data number 01.
The items displayed are in the following table.
Depending on models, the items that do not have corresponding data are not displayed.
8. To display the data of a different indoor unit, press the button, which allows you
to go back to the indoor unit selection screen.
9. Pressing the button will stop displaying data.
Pressing the (RESET) button during remote control unit operation will undo your last
operation and allow you to go back to the previous screen.
If two (2) remote controllers are connected to one (1) inside unit, only the master controller is available
for trial operation and confirmation of operation data. (The slave remote controller is not available.)
Drain pump operation from remote control unit is possible. Operate a remote control unit by
following the steps described below.
1. To start a forced drain pump operation.
Press the TEST button for three seconds or longer.
The display will change
Press the button once and cause to be displayed.
When the (SET) button is pressed, a drain pump operation will start.
Display:
2. To cancel a drain pump operation.
If either (SET) or button is pressed, a forced drain pump operation will
stop. The air conditioning system will become OFF.
If two (2) remote controllers are connected to one (1) inside unit, only the master controller is available
for trial operation and confirmation of operation data. (The slave remote controller is not available.)
Trail operation of drain pump
Depending on outdoor unit model, there are data not shown.
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
34
35
36
37
38
39
Data Item
(Operation Mode)
(Set Temperature)
(Return Air Temperature)
(Remote Controller Thermistor Temperature)
(Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger Thermistor / U Bend)
(Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger Thermistor /Capillary)
(Indoor Unit Heat Exchanger Thermistor /Gas Header)
(Indoor Unit Fan Speed)
(Frequency Requirements)
(Response Frequency)
(Pulse of Indoor Unit Expansion Valve)
(Total Running Hours of The Indoor Unit)
(Outdoor Air Temperature)
(Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger Thermistor)
(Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger Thermistor)
(Compressor Frequency)
(High Pressure)
(Low Pressure)
(Discharge Pipe Temperature)
(Comp Bottom Temperature)
(Current)
(Outdoor Unit Fan Speed)
(63H1 On/Off)
(Defrost Control On/Off)
(Total Running Hours of The Compressor)
(Pulse of The Outdoor Unit Expansion Valve EEVC)
(Pulse of The Outdoor Unit Expansion Valve EEVH)
-
239
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Function Setting by Remote Controller

The functional setting.
The initial function setting for typical using is performed automatically by the indoor unit connected, when remote controller and
indoor unit are connected.
As long as they are used in a typical manner, there wiil be no need to change the initial settings.
If you would like to change the initial setting marked , set your desired setting as for the selected item.
The procedure of functional setting is shown as the following diagram.
[Flow of function setting]
Start : Stop air-conditioner and press (SET) and
(MODE) buttons at the same time for over three seconds.
Finalize : Press (SET) button.
Reset : Press (RESET) button.
Select : Press button.
End : Press button.
It is possible to nish above setting on the way,
and unnished change of setting is unavailable.
Record and keep the
setting
Note 1: The initial setting marked is decided by connected indoor and outdoor unit, and is automatically defined as following table.
Function No.
Remote controller
function02
Remote controller
function06
Remote controller
function07
Remote controller
function13
Remote controller
function15
Default Model
Indoor unit with only one of air flow setting
Heat pump unit
Exclusive cooling unit
"Auto-RUN" mode selectable indoor unit.
Indoor unit without "Auto-RUN" mode
Indoor unit with two or three step of air flow setting
Indoor unit with only one of air flow setting
Indoor unit with automatically swing louver
Indoor unit without automatically swing louver
Indoor unit with three step of air flow setting
Indoor unit with two step of air flow setting
Item
-
240
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Function Setting by Remote Controller (continued)

01
When you use at 50Hz area
Automatical operation is impossible
Temperature setting button is not working
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Function
setting
Mode button is not working
On/Off button is not working
Fan speed button is not working
Louver button is not working
Timer button is not working
Remote thermistor is not working.
Remote thermistor is working.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing +3.0 C increase in temperature.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing -1.0 C increase in temperature.
If you change the range of set temperature, the indication of set temperature
will vary following the control.
If you change the range of set temperature, the indication of set temperature
will not vary following the control, and keep the set temperature.
If you change the remote controller function "14 ",
you must change the indoor function "04 " accordingly.
You can select the louver stop position in the four.
The louver can stop at any position.
In normal working indication, indoor unit temperature is indicated instead of airflow.
(Only the master remote controller can be indicated.)
Heating preparation indication should not be indicated.
Temperature indication is by degree C
Temperature indication is by degree F
ON/OFF button
(finished)
In case of Single split series, by connecting ventilation device to CNT of the
indoor printed circuit board (in case of VRF series, by connecting it to CND of the
indoor printed circuit board), the operation of ventilation device is linked with the
operation of indoor unit.
In case of Single split series, by connecting ventilation device to CNT of the indoor printed
circuit board (in case of VRF series, by connecting it to CND of the indoor printed circuit
board), you can operate /stop the ventilation device independently by (VENT) button.
If you input signal into CNT of the indoor printed circuit board from external, the
indoor unit will be operated independently according to the input from external.
If you input into CNT of the indoor printed circuit board from external, all units which
connect to the same remote controller are operated according to the input from external.
(i) Remote controller function
: Initial settings
: Automatic criterion
-
241
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Function Setting by Remote Controller (continued)

Indoor unit No. are indicated only when
plural indoor units are connected.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Note1: Fan setting of "HIGH SPEED"
Permission/prohibition control of operation will be valid.
Function
setting
To set other indoor unit, press
AIRCON NO. button, which
allows you to go back to the
indoor unit selection screen
(for example: I/U 000 ).
The filter sign is indicated after running for 180 hours.
The filter sign is indicated after running for 1000 hours, then the indoor unit will be stopped by
compulsion after 24 hours.
If you change the indoor function "04 ",
you must change the remote controller function "14 " accordingly.
You can select the louver stop position in the four.
The louver can stop at any position.
With the VRF series, it is used to stop all indoor units connected with the same outdoor unit immediately.
When stop signal is inputed from remote on-off terminal "CNT-6", all indoor units are stopped immediately.
To be reset for producing +3.0 C increase in temperature during heating.
To be reset producing +2.0 C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
To be reset producing -1.0 C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
When heating thermostat is OFF, fan speed is low speed.
When heating thermostat is OFF, fan speed is set speed.
When heating thermostat is OFF, fan speed is operated intermittently.
When heating thermostat is OFF, the fan is stopped.
When the remote thermistor is working, "FAN OFF" is set automatically.
Do not set "FAN OFF" when the indoor unit's thermistor is working.
Drain pump is run during cooling and dry.
Drain pump is run during cooling, dry and heating.
Drain pump is run during cooling, dry, heating and fan.
Drain pump is run during cooling, dry and fan.
After cooling is stopped the fan does not perform extra operation.
After cooling is stopped the fan perform extra operation for half an hour.
After cooling is stopped the fan perform extra operation for an hour.
After cooling is stopped the fan perform extra operation for six hours.
After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan does not perform extra operation.
After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF,the fan perform extra operation for half an hour.
After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF,the fan perform extra operation for two hours.
After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan perform extra operation for six hours.
During heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan perform intermittent operation for five
minutes with low fan speed after twenty minutes' OFF.
During heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan perform intermittent operation for five
minutes with low fan speed after five minutes' OFF.
Working only with the Single split series.
To control frost prevention, the indoor fan tap is raised.
Change of indoor heat exchanger temperature to start frost prevention control.

Stop air-conditioner and press
(SET) + (MODE) buttons
at the same time for over three seconds.
ON/OFF button
(finished)
(ii) Indoor unit function
: Initial settings
: Automatic criterion
-
242
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Control mode switching
The control content of indoor units can be switched in following way. ( is the default setting)
Switch No. control content
SW1 Indoor unit address (tens place)
SW2 Indoor unit address (ones place)
SW3 Outdoor unit address (tens place)
SW4 Outdoor unit address (ones place)
SW51 ON Fixed previous version of Super Link protocol
OFF Automatic adjustment of Super Link protocol
SW52 Indoor unit address (hundreds place)
SW61 ~ 4 Model capacity setting
SW71 ON Operation check, Drain motor test run
OFF Normal operation
Function of CNT connector of indoor printed circuit board
CNT connector (local) vendor model
Connector : Made by molex 5264-06
Terminals : Made by molex 5263 T
Troubleshooting
+12
Indoor units control box
(Blue 6P)
Printed circuit board
Red
Black
Yellow
Blue
Brown
Orange
Remote start/stop kit
Note (1): Do not use the length over 2 meter
White
Black
Yellow
Blue
Brown
Orange
Orange
Input
power
Remote start / stop button or timer point
Output 1: Operation output (there is output when unit is in operation.)
Output 2: Heating output (there is output when operation MODE is HEATING.)
Output 3: Thermo ON output
Output 4: Inspection output (there is out put when unit is stopped by error.)
Input 5: XR5 OFF ON UNIT ON
XR5 ON OFF UNIT OFF
XR5 OFF ON Receiving pulse signal, "ON/OFF"
is reversed.
Factory set
Local set
Refer to instruction manuals of "Branching controller", when the indoor unit is
connected to "Heat recovery 3-pipe systems".
Display on
remote
controller
LED on indoor circuit board
Content
Off
E1
E2
E3
E5
E6
E7
E9
E10
E11
E12
E16
E18
E19
E28
Over E30
E63
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Not sure Not sure
blinking once
blinking once
blinking once
blinking once
blinking once
blinking once
blinking once
blinking once
Duplication of indoor address No. (can only be detected during operation)
Excess number of remote controllers (can only be detected during operation) Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
Continuous blinking
blinking twice
blinking twice
Continuous
blinking
Fault on the transmission between indoor
circuit board and remote control
Indoor computer abnormal
Outdoor power off or lack phase
There is no corresponding outdoor unit address.
Fault on outdoor-indoor transmission
Indoor air inhaling sensor broken or short-circuit
Float SW actions (only with FS)
Excess number of remote controller connections
The master indoor unit is not set properly.
Fan motor abnormal
The address configuration fault for master-slave indoor units.
Configuration fault on running checking model
Remote controller sensor interrupted
Outdoor unit checking (outdoor circuit board LED checking)
Emergency stop.
Super link
New specification
Old specification
Indoor unit address SW
Indoor No. Outdoor No.
Indoor heat exchange sensor interrupted or short-circuit
Off
Normal
Fault on power, indoor power off or lack phase
Continuous blinking
red (checking) green (normal)
001127 49
047 4849
4849 047
Error code of indoor unit
Note
Butt splice
CNT
Common
Output
Output
Output
Output
Function
(Application coverage
0.751.25mm
2
)
The operation data is saved when the situation of abnormal operation happen,
and the data can be confirmed by remote controller.
[Operating procedure]
1. Press the button.
The display change
2. Once, press the button, and the display change .
3. Press the (SET) button and abnormal operation data mode is started.
4. When only one indoor unit is connected to remote controller, following is
displayed.
The case that there is history of abnormal operation.
Error code and is displayed.
[Example]: [E8] (ERROR CODE)
is displayed (blinking indication during data loading).
Next, the abnormal operation data of the indoor unit will be displayed.
Skip to step 7.
The case that there is not history of abnormal operation.
is displayed for 3 seconds and this mode is closed.
5. When plural indoor units is connected, following is displayed.
The case that there is history of abnormal operation.
Error code and the smallest address number of indoor unit among all
connected indoor unit is displayed.
blinking
The case that there is not history of abnormal operation.
Only address number is displayed.
6. Select the indoor unit number you would like to have data displayed with the
button.
7. Determine the indoor unit number with the (SET) button.
(The address of selected indoor unit is blinking for 2 seconds.)
[E8] (A blinking indication appears while data loaded.)
Next, the abnormal operation data is indicated.
If the indoor unit doing normal operation is selected, is displayed for 3 seconds and address of indoor unit is displayed.
8. By the button, the abnormal operation data is displayed.
Displayed data item is based on Trial operation .
Depending on models, the items that do not have corresponding data are not displayed.
9. To display the data of a different indoor unit, press the AIR CON No. button, which allows you to go back to the indoor unit slection screen.
10.Pressing the button will stop displaying data.
Pressing the (RESET) button during remote control unit operation will undo your last operation and allow you to go back to the previous screen.
If two (2) remote controllers are connected to one (1) inside unit, only the master controller is available for trial operation and confirmation of operation
data. (The slave remote controller is not available.)
-
243
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Read together with indoor unit's installation manual.
Accessories Remote controller, wood screw (3.5 16) 2 pieces
Prepare on site Remote controller cord (2 cores) the insulated thickness in 1mm or more.
[In case of embedding cord] Erectrical box, M4 screw (2 pieces)
[In case of exposing cord] Cord clamp (if needed)
Screw
Installation procedure
Open the cover of remote controller , and remove the screw under the
buttons without fail.
Remove the upper case of remote controller.
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the dented part of the upper part
of the remote controller, and wrench slightly.
[In case of embedding cord]
Embed the erectrical box and remote controller cord beforehand.
Prepare two M4 screws (recommended length is 12-16mm) on site, and install the lower case to erectrical box.
Choose either of the following two positions in fixing it with screws.
Connect the remote controller cord to the terminal block.
Connect the terminal of remote controller (X,Y) with the terminal of
indoor unit (X,Y). (X and Y are no polarity)
Install the upper case as before so as not to catch up the remote controller cord,
and tighten with the screws.
[In case of exposing cord]
You can pull out the remote controller cord from left upper part or center upper part.
Cut off the upper thin part of remote controller lower case with a nipper or knife,
and grind burrs with a file etc.
Install the lower case to the flat wall with attached two wooden screws.
WARNING
CAUTION
Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply unexpected stress on the
terminal.
Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or fire.
DO NOT install the remote controller at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
DO NOT leave the remote controller without the upper case.
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight
(2) Places near heat devices
(3) High humidity places
In case the upper cace needs to be detached, protect the remote controller with a packaging box or bag in
order to keep it away from water and dust.
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation
(5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
(6) Uneven surface
Tighten the screws after
cutting off the thin part of
screw mounting part.
Controller cord
Erectrical box
(Prepare on site)
Lower part Lower part
Upper part
Lower case Lower case
Wiring oulet
Wiring oulet
M4 screw 2 (Prepare on site)
The thin part
Upper part
Lower
Lower case
Upper
Lower
Lower case
Upper
7.3 Instullation manual for wired remote controller (Option parts : RC-E4)
A PJA012D729A
-
244
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Installation and wiring of remote controller
2
2 core wires or cables. (on-site configuration)
Maximum prolongation of remote controller wiring is 600 m.
100 - 200m
.........................
0.5mm
2
2 cores
Under 300m
.......................
0.75mm
2
2 cores
Under 400m
.......................
1.25mm
2
2 cores
Under 500m
.......................
2.0mm
2
2 cores
Master/ slave setting when more than one remote controllers are used
A maximum of two remote controllers can be connected to one indoor unit (or one group of indoor units.)
Remote controller cord (no polarity)
Remote controller
SW1 "Master"
Switch Setting Contents
M Master remote controller
SW1
S Slave remote controller
The indication when power source is supplied
When power source is turned on, the following is displayed on the remote controller until the
communication between the remote controller and indoor unit settled.
Master remote controller : " "
Slave remote controller : " "
At the same time, a mark or a number will be displayed for two seconds first.
This is the software's administration number of the remote controller, not an error cord.
When remote controller cannot communicate with the indoor unit for half an hour, the below indication will
appear.
Check wiring of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit etc.
Connect the remote controller cord to the
terminal block.
Connect the terminal of remote controller (X,Y)
with the terminal of indoor unit (X,Y).
(X and Y are no polarity)
Wiring route is as shown in the right diagram
depending on the pulling out direction.
The wiring inside the remote controller case should be within 0.3mm
2
(recommended) to 0.5mm
2
.
The sheath should be peeled off inside the remote controller case.
The peeling-off length of each wire is as below.
Pulling out from upper left Pulling out from upper center
X wiring : 215mm
Y wiring : 195mm
X wiring : 170mm
Y wiring : 190mm
Install the upper case as before so as not to catch up the remote controller cord, and tighten with
the screws.
In case of exposing cord, fix the cord on the wall with cord clamp so as not to slack.
In case of pulling out from
upper left
In case of pulling out from
upper center
The peeling-off length
of sheath
Wiring Wiring
Upper Upper
Sheath
Upper case Upper case
Board
Board
Lower Lower
But, wiring in the remote controller case should be under 0.5mm
2
. Change the wire size outside
of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is necessary at the wire
connecting section. Be careful about contact failure.
Remote controller
SW1 "Slave"
Lower
Master
Slave
Upper
Board
The left mark is only an
example. Other marks may
appear.
Sheath
Indoor units
Set SW1 to "Slave" for the slave remote controller. It was factory set to "Master" for shipment.
Note: The setting "Remote controller thermistor enabled" is only selectable with the master remote
controller in the position where you want to check room temperature.
The air conditioner operation follows the last operation of the remote controller regardless of the
master/ slave setting of it.
600
-
245
-
'10 KX-DB-147
The range of temperature setting
When shipped, the range of set temperature differs depending on the operation mode as below.
Heating : 16~30C (55~86F)
Except heating (cooling, fan, dry, automatic) : 18~30C (62~86F)
Upper limit and lower limit of set temperature can be changed with remote controller.
Upper limit setting: valid during heating operation. Possible to set in the range of 20 to 30C (68 to 86F).
Lower limit setting: valid except heating (automatic, cooling, fan, dry) Possible to set in the range of 18 to 26C (62 to
79F).
When you set upper and lower limit by this function, control as below.
1. When TEMP RANGE SET, remote controller function of function setting mode is "INDN CHANGE" (factory setting),
During heating, you cannot set the value exceeding the upper limit.
During operation mode except heating, you cannot set the value below the lower limit.
2. When TEMP RANGE SET, remote controller function of function setting mode is "NO INDN CHANGE"
During heating, even if the value exceeding the upper limit is set, upper limit value will be sent to the indoor unit.
But, the indication is the same as the temperature set.
During except heating, even if the value lower than the lower limit is set, lower limit value will be sent to the indoor unit.
But, the indication is the same as the temperature set.
How to set upper and lower limit value
1. Stop the air-conditioner, and press (SET) and (MODE) button at the same time for over three
seconds .
The indication changes to "FUNCTION SET ".
2. Press button once, and change to the "TEMP RANGE " indication.
3. Press (SET) button, and enter the temperature range setting mode.
4. Select "UPPER LIMIT " or "LOWER LIMIT " by using button.
5. Press (SET) button to fix.
6. When "UPPER LIMIT " is selected (valid during heating)
Press (SET) button to fix. Indication example: "UPPER 26C" (Displayed for two seconds)
After the fixed upper limit value displayed for two seconds, the indication will return to "UPPER LIMIT ".
7. When "LOWER LIMIT " is selected (valid during cooling, dry, fan, automatic)
Indication: " SET UP" "LOWER 18C "
8. Press ON/OFF button to finish.
Previous button
If upper limit value is set
If upper limit value is set
If lower limit value is set
If lower limit value is set
Indication: " SET UP" "UPPER 30C "
Select the upper limit value with temperature setting button . Indication example: "UPPER 26C "
(blinking)
Select the lower limit value with temperature setting button . Indication example: "LOWER 24C "
(blinking)
Press (SET) button to fix. Indication for example: "LOWER 24C" (Displayed for two seconds)
After the fixed lower limit value displayed for two seconds, the indication will return to "LOWER LIMIT ".
It is possible to finish by pressing
ON/OFF button on the way, but
unfinished change of setting is
unavailable.
During setting, if you press
(RESET) button, you return to the
previous screen.
'10 KX-DB-147
-
246
-
-
247
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Press or button.
Make sure which do you want to set, " FUNCTION "
(remote controller function) or "I/U FUNCTION " (indoor
unit function).
How to set function
2.
1.
3.
4.
5.
It is possible to finish by pressing ON/OFF button on the way, but unfinished change of setting is
unavailable.
During setting, if you press (RESET) button, you return to the previous screen.
Setting is memorized in the controller and it is saved independently of power failure.
How to check the current setting
When you select from "No. and funcion" and press set button by the previous operation, the "Setting" displayed first is the current
setting.
(But, if you select "ALL UNIT ", the setting of the lowest number indoor unit is displayed.)
Stop air-conditioner and press (SET) (MODE)
buttons at the same time for over three seconds, and the
"FUNCTION SET " will be displayed.
Press (SET) button.
Selecct " FUNCTION " (remote controller function) or "I/U
FUNCTION " (indoor unit function).
Operation message
Function description: ,
setting description:
Function No.
Fixing button
Finishing button
7
2
1
6
Starting button
Previous screen button Indoor unit selection button
Press (SET) button.
6.
"DATA LOADING" (Indication with blinking)
Display is changed to "01 GRILLE SET".
7.
"DATA LOADING" (Blinking for 2 to 23 seconds to read the data)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Press (SET) button.
On the occasion of remote controller function selection On the occasion of indoor unit function selection
Press or button.
"No. and function"are indicated by turns on the remote
controller function table, then you can select from them.
(For example)
Press or button.
Select the setting.
Press or button.
Select the setting.
The current setting of selected function is indicated.
(for example) "AUTO RUN ON" If "02 AUTO RUN SET" is
selected
Press (SET) button.
Press (SET) button.
Press or button.
Press or button.
Select the number of the indoor unit you are to set
If you select "ALL UNIT ", you can set the same setting with
all unites.
Press (SET)
"SET COMPLETE" will be indicated, and the setting will be
completed.
Then after "No. and function" indication returns, Set as the
same procedure if you want to set continuously ,and if to
finish, go to 7.
Press ON/OFF button.
Setting is finished.
Indication is changed to "02 FAN SPEED SET".
Go to .
[Note]
If plural indoor units are connected to a remote controller,
the indication is "I/U 000" (blinking) The lowest number of
the indoor unit connected is indicated.
"No. and function" are indicated by turns on the indoor unit function
table, then you can select from them.
(For example)
The current setting of selected function is indicated.
(For example) "STANDARD" If "02 FAN SPEED SET" is
selected.
Press (SET) button.
"SET COMPLETE" will be indicated, and the setting will be
completed.
Then after "No. and function" indication returns, set as the same
procedure if you want to set continuously , and if to finish, go to 7.
Setting
Function No.
Function
When plural indoor units are connected to a remote controller,
press the AIRCON NO. button, which allows you to go back to
the indoor unit selection screen. (example "I/U 000 ")
Function No.
Function
Setting
-
248
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PCB012D015L
KX SERIES INSTALLATION MANUAL
This installation manual deals with outdoor units and general installation specications only. For indoor units, please refer to the respective installation manuals supplied with your
units.
Please read this manual carefully before you set to installation work and carry it out according to the instructions contained in this manual.
Outdoor unit capacity
FDC224335
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
We recommend you to read this "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" carefully before the installation work in order to gain full advantage of the functions of the unit and to avoid malfunction due to
mishandling.
The precautions described below are divided into and . The matters with possibilities leading to serious consequences such as death or serious personal
injury due to erroneous handling are listed in the and the matters with possibilities leading to personal injury or damage of the unit due to erroneous handling including
probability leading to serious consequences in some cases are listed in . These are very important precautions for safety. Be sure to observe all of them without fail.
The meaning of"Marks"used here are as shown on the right.
Be sure to conrm no anomaly on the equipment by commissioning after completed installation and explain the operating methods as well as the maintenance methods of this equipment to
the user according to the owner's manual.
Keep the installation manual together with owner's manual at a place where any user can read at any time. Moreover if necessary, ask to hand them to a new user
This unit complies with EN61000-3-3.
For outdoor unit, EN61000-3-2 is not applicable as consent by the utility company or notication to the utility company is given before usage. (Only 224, 280)
For outdoor unit, EN61000-3-12 is not applicable as consent by the utility company or notication to the utility company is given before usage. (Only 335)
Never do it under any circumstance. Always do it according to the instruction.
WARNINGS
WARNINGS
CAUTIONS
CAUTIONS
WARNING CAUTION
Installation must be carried out by the qualied installer.
If you install the system by yourself, it may cause serious trouble such as water leaks, electric shocks, re and personal injury ,
as a result of a system malfunction.
Install the system in full accordance with the instruction manual.
Incorrect installation may cause bursts, personal injury, water leaks, electric shocks and re.
Use the original accessories and the specied components for installation.
If parts other than those prescribed by us are used, It may cause fall of the unit, water leaks, electric shocks, re, refrigerant leak,
substanard performance, contrl failure and personal injury.
When installing in small rooms, take prevention measures not to exceed the density limit of refrigerant in the event of leakage
accordance with ISO5149.
Consult the expert about prevention measures. If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of leakage, lack of
oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accidents.
Ventilate the working area well in the event of refrigerant leakage during installation.
If the refrigerant comes into contact with naked ames, poisonous gas is produced.
After completed installation, check that no refrigerant leaks from the system.
If refrigerant leaks into the room and comes into contact with an oven or other hot surface, poisonous gas is produced.
Hang up the unit at the specied points with ropes which can support the weight in lifting for portage. And to avoid jolting out of
alignment, be sure to hang up the unit at 4-point support.
An improper manner of portage such as 3-point support can cause death or serious personal injury due to falling of the unit.
Install the unit in a location with good support.
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the unit to fall and cause material damage and personal injury.
Ensure the unit is stable when installed, so that it can withstand earthquakes and strong winds.
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the unit to fall and cause material damage and personal injury.
The electrical installation must be carried out by the qualied electrician in accordance with "the norm for electrical work" and
"national wiring regulation", and the system must be connected to the dedicated circuit.
Power supply with insufcient capacity and incorrect function done by improper work can cause electric shocks and re.
Be sure to shut off the power before starting electrical work.
Failure to shut off the power can cause electric shocks, unit failure or incorrect function of equipment.
Be sure to use the cables conformed to safety standard and cable ampacity for power distribution work.
Unconformable cables can cause electric leak, anomalous heat production or re.
Use the prescribed cables for electrical connection, tighten the cables securely in terminal block and relieve the cables correctly
to prevent overloading the terminal blocks.
Loose connections or cable mountings can cause anomalous heat production or re.
Arrange the wiring in the control box so that it cannot be pushed up further into the box. Install the service panel correctly.
Incorrect installation may result in overheating and re.
In connecting the power cable, make sure that no anomakies such as dust deposits, socket clogging or wobble are found and
insert the plug securely.
Accumulation of dust, clogging on the socket, or looseness of plugging can cause electric shocks and re.
Be sure not to reuse existing refrigerant pipes
Conventional refrigerant oil or chlorine contained in the conventional refrigerant which is remaining in the existing refrigerant
pipes can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil of new unit. And 1.6 times higher pressure of R410A refrigerant than conventional
one can cause burst of existing pipe, personal injury or serious accident.
Do not perform brazing work in the airtight room
It can cause lack of oxygen.
Use the prescribed pipes, are nuts and tools for R410A.
Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C) can cause the unit failure and serious accidents due to burst of the refrigerant circuit.
Tighten the are nut by using double spanners and torque wrench according to prescribed method. Be sure not to tighten the
are nut too much.
Loose are connection or damage on the are part by tightening with excess torque can cause burst or refrigerant leaks which
may result in lack of oxygen.
Do not open the service valves for liquid line and gas line until completed refrigerant piping work, air tightness test and evacuation.
If the compressor is operated in state of opening service valves before completed connection of refrigerant piping work, you may
incur frost bite or injury from an abrupt refrigerant outow and air can be sucked into refrigerant circuit, which can cause burst or
personal injury due to anomalously high pressure in the refrigerant.
Do not put the drainage pipe directly into drainage channels where poisonous gases such as sulphide gas can occur.
Poisonous gases will ow into the room through drainage pipe and seriously affect the user's health and safety. It can also cau se
the corrosion of the indoor unit and resultant unit failure or refrigerant leak.
Only use prescribed optional parts. The installation must be carried out by the qualied installer.
If you install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water leaks, electric shocks, re.
Do not perform any change of protective device itself or its setup condition
The forced operation by short-circuiting protective device of pressure switch and temperature controller or the use of non
specied component can cause re or burst.
Be sure to switch off the power supply in the event of installation, inspection or servicing.
If the power supply is not shut off, there is a risk of electric shocks, unit failure or personal injury due to the unexpected start of fan.
Consult the dealer or an expert regarding removal of the unit.
Incorrect installation can cause water leaks, electric shocks or re.
Stop the compressor before closing valve and disconnecting refrigerant pipes in case of pump down operation.
If disconnecting refrigerant pipes in state of opening service valves before compressor stopping, you may incur frost bite or injury
from an abrupt refrigerant outow and air can be sucked, which can cause burst or personal injury due to anomalously high
pressure in the refrigerant circuit.
Ensure that no air enters in the refrigerant circuit when the unit is installed and removed.
If air enters in the refrigerant circuit, the pressure in the refrigerant circuit becomes too high, which can cause burst and
personal injury.
Do not run the unit with removed panels or protections
Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or high voltage parts can cause personal injury due to entrapment, burn or electric shocks.
Be sure to x up the service panels.
Incorrect xing can cause electric shocks or re due to intrusion of dust or water.
Do not perform any repairs or modications by yourself. Consult the dealer if the unit requires repair.
If you repair or modify the unit, it can cause water leaks, electric shocks or re.
Use the circuit breaker for all pole with correct capacity.
Using the incorrect circuit breaker, it can cause the unit malfunction and re.
Take care when carrying the unit by hand.
If the unit weights more than 20kg, it must be carried by two or more persons. Do not carry by the plastic straps, always use the carry handle
when carrying the unit by hand. Use gloves to minimize the risk of cuts by the aluminum ns.
Dispose of any packing materials correctly.
Any remaining packing materials can cause personal injury as it contains nails and wood. And to avoid danger of suffocation,
be sure to keep the plastic wrapper away from children and to dispose after tear it up.
Pay attention not to damage the drain pan by weld spatter when welding work is done near the indoor unit.
If weld spatter entered into the indoor unit during welding work, it can cause pin-hole in drain pan and result in water
leakage. To prevent such damage, keep the indoor unit in its packing or cover it.
Be sure to insulate the refrigerant pipes so as not to condense the ambient air moisture on them.
Insufcient insulation can cause condensation, which can lead to moisture damage on the ceiling, oor, furniture and any
other valuables.
Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after completed refrigerant piping work.
If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room, lack of oxygen can occur,
which can cause serious accidents.
Perform installation work properly according to this installation manual.
Improper installation can cause abnormal vibrations or increased noise generation.
Carry out the electrical work for ground lead with care.
Do not connect the ground lead to the gas line, water line, lightning conductor or telephone line's ground lead. Incorrect
grounding can cause unit faults such as electric shocks due to short-circuiting.Never connect the grounding wire to a
gas pipe because if gas leaks, it could cause explosion or ignition.
Never connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe because if gas leaks, It could explosion or ignition.
Earth leakage breaker must be installed
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause re or electric shocks.
Do not use any materials other than a fuse with the correct rating in the location where fuses are to be used.
Connecting the circuit with copper wire or other metal thread can cause unit failure and re.
Do not install the unit near the location where leakage of combustible gases can occur.
If leaked gases accumulate around the unit, it can cause re.
Do not install the unit where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or combustible gas (such as thinner and petroleum
gases) can accumulate or collect, or where volatile combustible substances are handled.
Corrosive gas can cause corrosion of heat exchanger, breakage of plastic parts and etc. And combustible gas can cause re.
Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specied in the manual.
Insufcient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling from the installation place.
When the outdoor unit is installed on a roof or a high place, provide permanent ladders and handrails along the access
route and fences and handrails around the outdoor unit.
If safety facilities are not provided, it can cause personal injury due to falling from the installation place.
Do not install nor use the system close to the equipment that generates electromagnetic elds or high frequency harmonics
Equipment such as inverters, standby generators, medical high frequency equipments and telecommunication equipments can
affect the system, and cause malfunctions and breakdowns. The system can also affect medical equipment and
telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its function or cause jamming.
Do not install the outdoor unit in a location where insects and small animals can inhabit.
Insects and small animals can enter the electric parts and cause damage or re. Instruct the user to keep the surroundings clean.
Do not use the base ame for outdoor unit which is corroded or damaged due to long periods of operation.
Using an old and damage base ame can cause the unit falling down and cause personal injury.
Do not install the unit in the locations listed below
Locations where carbon ber, metal powder or any powder is oating.
Locations where any substances that can affect the unit such as sulphide gas, chloride gas, acid and alkaline can occur.
Vehicles and ships
Locations where cosmetic or special sprays are often used.
Locations with direct exposure of oil mist and steam such as kitchen and machine plant.
Locations where any machines which generate high frequency harmonics are used.
Locations with salty atmospheres such as coastlines
Locations with heavy snow (If installed, be sure to provide base ame and snow hood mentioned in the manual)
Locations where the unit is exposed to chimney smoke
Locations at high altitude (more than 1000m high)
Locations with ammonic atmospheres
Locations where heat radiation from other heat source can affect the unit
Locations without good air circulation.
Locations with any obstacles which can prevent inlet and outlet air of the unit
Locations where short circuit of air can occur (in case of multiple units installation)
Locations where strong air blows against the air outlet of outdoor unit
It can cause remarkable decrease in performance, corrosion and damage of components, malfunction and re.
Do not install the outdoor unit in the locations listed below.
Locations where discharged hot air or operating sound of the outdoor unit can bother neighborhood.
Locations where outlet air of the outdoor unit blows directly to an animal or plants. The outlet air can affect adversely to
the plant etc.
Locations where vibration can be amplied and transmitted due to insufcient strength of structure.
Locations where vibration and operation sound generated by the outdoor unit can affect seriously.
(on the wall or at the place near bed room)
Locations where an equipment affected by high harmonics is placed. (TV set or radio receiver is placed within 5m)
Locations where drainage cannot run off safely.
It can affect surrounding environment and cause a claim
Do not use the unit for special purposes such as storing foods, cooling precision instruments and preservation of animals,
plants or art.
It can cause the damage of the items.
Do not touch any buttons with wet hands
It can cause electric shocks
Do not shut off the power supply immediately after stopping the operation.
Wait at least 5 minutes, otherwise there is a risk of water leakage or breakdown.
Do not control the system with main power switch.
It can cause re or water leakage. In addition, the fan can start unexpectedly, which can cause personal injury.
Do not touch any refrigerant pipes with your hands when the system is in operation.
During operation the refrigerant pipes become extremely hot or extremely cold depending the operating condition, and it
can cause burn injury or frost injury.
Do not operate the outdoor unit with any article placed on it.
You may incur property damage or personal injure from a fall of the article.
Do not step onto the outdoor unit.
You may incur injury from a drop or fall.
When install the unit, be sure to check whether the selection of installation place, power supply specications, usage limitation (piping length, height differences between
indoor and outdoor units, power supply voltage and etc.) and installation spaces.
Application data
L
7.4 Installation of outdoor unit
-
249
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Notabilia as a unit designed for R410A
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Gauge manifold
Charge hose
Electronic scale for refrigerant charging
Torque wrench
Flare tool
Protrusion control copper pipe gauge
Vacuum pump adapter
Gas leak detector
Dedicated R410A tools
Do not use any refrigerant other than R410A. R410A will rise to pressure about 1.6 times higher than that of a conventional refrigerant.
A unit designed for R410A has adopted a different size outdoor unit service valve charge port and a different size check joint provided in the unit to
prevent the charging of a wrong refrigerant by mistake. The processed dimension of the ared part of a refrigerant pipe and a are nut's parallel side
measurement have also been altered to raise strength against pressure. Accordingly, you are required to arrange dedicated R410A tools listed in the
table on the right before installing or servicing this unit.
Do not use a charge cylinder. The use of a charge cylinder will cause the refrigerant composition to change, which results in performance degradation.
In charging refrigerant, always take it out from a cylinder in the liquid phase.
All indoor units must be models designed exclusively for R410A. Please check connectable indoor unit models in a catalog, etc.
(A wrong indoor unit, if connected into the system, will impair proper system operation)
Caution
Be sure to read this manual before installation to follow the proper installation methods.
When installing the indoor unit, read the installation manual of indoor unit.
Optional distribution parts are required for the piping (Branch pipe set, header set). For details, refer to the catalog, etc.
Make sure to install the earth leakage breaker. (Select a product compatible with high frequency.)
There is risk of damaging the compressor if the unit is operated while the discharge pipe thermistor, suction pipe thermistor, pressure sensor, etc. are removed. Never attempt to
operation in such condition.
1. BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION (Check that the models, power supply specications, piping, wiring are correct.)
Name Quantity Location of use
Accessory
Wire

1
1
1
Insert this in CNG on the outdoor unit PCB when using the silencing mode or
forced cooling mode
Secured in the control box with adhesive tape.
It is attached to the bracket with an adhesive tape
in the proximity of the service valve.
Attached on the base below the operation valve.
Attached on the base below the operation valve.
Edging
Attached
wire
Instruction manual
Use it for protection of a knock-out hole.
Use this when connecting gas pipe.
When the installation work is completed,
give instructions to the customer and ask him/her to keep it.
[Items sold separately]
Refrigerant pipe distribution parts, which are not contained in the package, will be required for installation.
As for refrigerant pipe distribution parts, we offer branching pipe sets (Model type: DIS) and header sets (Model type: HEAD) as parts used on the indoor side of piping.
Please select one suiting your application. In selecting distribution parts, please also refer to 4. REFRIGERANT PIPING.
If you are not sure which parts to select, please consult with your dealer or the manufacture.
Use refrigerant branching pipe sets and header sets designed exclusively for R410A without fail.
2. INSTALLATION LOCATION (Obtain approval from the customer when selecting the installation area.)
2-1. Selecting the installation location
Where air is not trapped.
Where the installation ttings can be rmly installed.
Where any object does not prevent inlet or outlet air.
Out of the heat range of other heat sources.
Where strong winds will not blow against the outlet air.
A place where stringent regulation of electric noises is applicable.
Where it is safe for the drain water to be discharged.
Where noise and hot air will not bother neighboring residents.
Where snow will not accumulate.
A place where no TV set or radio receiver is placed within 5m.
(If electrical interference is caused, seek a place less likely to cause the problem)
Please note
a) If there is a possibility of a short-circuit, then install a ex ow adapter.
b) When installing multiple units, provide sufcient intake space so that a short-circuit does not occur.
c) In areas where there is snowfall, install the unit in a frame or under a snow hood to prevent snow from accumulating on it.
(Inhibition of collective drain discharge in a snowy country)
d) Do not install the equipment in areas where there is a danger for potential explosive atmosphere.
e) Install the equipment in a location that can sufciently support the weight of the equipment.
f) If a unit is installed into a special environment as shown below, there will be a danger that the corrosion of the outdoor unit or its
malfunctioning is caused. If this is the case, please consult with the distributor from whom you have purchased the unit.
Where corrosive gas is generated (such as a hot-spring resort area).
Where the unit is subject to sea breezes (coastal area).
Where the unit is subject to oil mists.
Where equipment generating electromagnetic waves exists in the vicinity.
g) When strong winds occur
Where it is likely that the unit is subjected to strong winds, provide wind guards according to the following guidelines.
Strong winds can cause performance degradation, an accidental stop due to a rise of high pressure and a broken fan.
CAUTION
Please leave sufcient clearance
around the unit without fail.
Otherwise, a risk of compressor
and/or electric component failure
may arise.
O
v
e
r 5
0
0
m
m
Fasten with anchor bolts
Place the unit outlet pipe perpendicular
to the wind direction.
Please install so the direction of the air from the blowing
outlet will be perpendicular to the direction of the wind.
When the foundation is not level, use wires
to tie down the unit.
When installing units side
by side, install the fex
fow adaptor. (This is not
required if a distance of
1,500 mm may be
secured between the
blowing outlet and the
wall.)
Wind direction
Wind direction
Combination pattern
Combination pattern of outdoor units, number of indoor units connected and capacity of connection are as show in the table at right.
It can be used in combination with the following indoor unit.
Indoor unit Remote controller Connection OK/NO
FDKXE6 RC-E4(2 cores) OK
FDAKXE4 RC-E1R(3 cores) OK
Capacity
224
280
335
Combination pattern
Single
Single
Single
Number of units connected (unit)
115
119
122
Range of total capacity of connected indoor units
112336
140420
167502
Outdoor unit Indoor unit
Caution
If superlink I (previous superlink) is selected, all the range of usage and limitations, not only the limitations of connectable indoor capacity and connectable
number of indoor unit but also of the piping length, operating temperature range and etc., become same as those of KX4 (See technical) manual 07
.
KX
.
KXR-T-114). In addition to above limitations, all of new functions for KX6 such as automatic address setting function for multiple refrigerant systems and etc.
wll be cancelled.
-
250
-
'10 KX-DB-147
2
0
Out door unit
Height difference
between indoor
units: 18 mthicker
Height difference 50 m
Actual length 160 m
Equivalent length 185 m
Total piping length 510 m
Indoor unit
Suction
Blowout
195 195 690
Foundation bolt position
(4 places)
2
0
5
2
0
2
0
The protrusion of an anchor bolt on the front side must be
kept within 15 mm.
Securely install the unit so that it does not fall over during
earthquakes or strong winds, etc.
Refer to the above illustrations for information regarding
concrete foundations.
Install the unit in a level area. (With a gradient of 5 mm or
less.)
Improper installation can result in a compressor failure, broken
piping within the unit and abnormal noise generation.
Wooden base
Wear plate
3-1. Delivery
Deliver the unit in the packing to the specied installation place.
To hoist the unit, attach a pair of textile ropes with cushion materials attached to protect it.
Request
Put cushion materials between the unit and the ropes to avoid damages.
Attach the ropes on the unit and carry it in avoiding displacement of gravity center.
Improper slinging may cause the unit to lose balance and fall.
4. REFRIGERANT PIPING
3. Unit delivery and installation
(1) Limitation on use of pipes
Caution
When arranging pipes, observe the restrictions on use concerning the longest distance of (1), total piping length,
allowable pipe length from initial branching and allowable difference of height (difference between heads).
Avoid any trap ( ) or bump ( ) in piping as they can cause fuid stagnation.
Maximum length (To the furthest indoor unit) Actual length Less than 160 m (Actual length less
than 185 m)
It is required to change the pipe diameter when the actual length exceeds 90 m.
Determine the size of main pipe, referring to the table of main pipe selection table of (3) (a).
Total piping length 510 m or less
Length of main pipe 130 m or less
Allowable pipe length from initial branching 90 m or less
Difference in pipe lengths between indoor units, however, is 40 m or less.
Allowable difference in height (Difference of heads)
(a) When an indoor unit is positioned at a higher place 50 m or less
(b) When an outdoor unit is positioned at a lower place 40 m or less
(c) Difference of heights between indoor units in a system 18 m or less
(d) Difference of heights between initial branching and indoor unit 18 m or less
(2) Selection of pipe material
Use pipes with the inside clean and free from any harmful sulfur, oxides, dirt, chips & oil, or moisture
(contamination).
Use following refrigerant pipes.
Material Phosphate deoxidation treated seamless pipe (C1220T-O, 1/2H, JIS H3300)
C1220T-1/2H for O.D. 19.05 or more, or C1220T-O for 15.8 or less
Wall thickness and size - Select according to the guide for pipe size selection
(This product uses R410A. Since, in case of pipes in the size of 19.05 or more, materials of -O
lacks suffcient capacity to withstand pressure, make sure to use pipes of 1/2H material and
thickness larger than the minimum thickness.)
When a pipe is branched, make sure to use our branching set or header set.
When setting branching pipes, take care of the mounting direction and consult carefully with the
instruction manual.
Regarding the handling of operation valve, refer to 4-3 (1) Operating method of operation valve.
Make sure to lock the xing legs of outdoor unit with 4 pieces of anchor bolt (M10). Best margin of protrusion for bolt above the
oor is 20 mm.
When installing the unit, make sure to lock its legs with the following bolts.
3-2. Cautions for installation
CAUTION
Make sure to install within the range of limitation. Otherwise, resulting
malfunction of compressor may not be warranted. Observe always the
limitation of use during installation.
4-1. Determination of piping specications (Please select from the following matrix according to indoor unit specications and installation site conditions)
Lock with bolt (M10-12)
Suction Blowout
Use a long block to extend the width.
Use a thicker
block to anchor
deeper.
Sample
Size
1
2
3
4
Open
300
300
250 (5)
Open
5
300
250 (5)
1500 (500)
Open
300
250 (5)
Air
inlet
Air
inlet
Air
outlet
Service
space
L3
L2
L4
L1
(Unit : mm)
a) Minimum installation space
(Please select an installation point with due attention to the direction of installation of the refrigerant pipe)
(If the installation conditions shown in this drawing are not satised, please consult with your dealer
or the manufacturer.)
b) When units are installed side by side, leave a 10 mm or wider service space between the units.
c) Dont install at a place where it will be surrounded with walls in four directions.
Even when it is not surrounded with walls in four directions and it is met the installation conditions
as shown by this gure, if there is risk of short-circuit, install the ex ow adaptor to prevent the
short-circuit.
d) There must be a 1-meter or larger space in the above.
e) A barrier wall placed in front of the exhaust diffuser must not be higher than the unit.
2-2. Installation space (Ex. servicing space)
Important
In case that the unit operates in cooling mode, when the outdoor temperature is 5C or lower,
please equip a ex ow adapter and a snow guard hood (option) on the unit.

Figure in ( ) shows the value applicable when the fex fow
adaptor is installed.
*1
*1
Under the setting condition as specifed in ( ) , it is necessary to
secured 250 mm for the dimension L4 when replacing the compressor.
Establish this for example by moving the unit during the work.
*2
*2 *2 *2
-
251
-
'10 KX-DB-147
g
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Branch pipe set for indoor unit side
Model: DIS
Branch pipe set for indoor unit side
Model: DIS
Header set for indoor unit side
Model: HEAD
A
B
B
C C
B
B
C
C C
C
C C
(3) Pipe size selection
Floor surface Floor surface
Floor surface
Liquid side
Horizontal
Floor surface
Floor surface
Gas side
Floor surface
Branching at
downstream
side
Outdoor unit
224
280
335
Gas pipe
19.5t1.0
22.22t1.0
25.4(28.58)t1.0
Liquid pipe
9.52t0.8
12.7t0.8
Gas pipe
22.22t1.0
25.4(28.58)t1.0
Liquid pipe
12.7t0.80
Main pipe size (Ordinary) Pipe size for actual length longer than 90 m
For 19.05 or larger, use C1220T-1/2H material.
Make sure to use the attached pipes
in the length as shown at left.
*1: When connecting indoor units of 280 at the downstream and the main gas pipe is of 22.22 or larger, use the pipe of 22.22x t1
(a) Main pipe (Between branch at outdoor unit side - initial branch at indoor unit side): Section A in Fig. 1
When the maximum length (to the furthest indoor unit from outdoor unit) is 90 m or more (actual length), change the size of main pipe as shown
by the following table.
(b) Between initial branch at indoor unit side- indoor unit side: Section B in Fig. 1
Select from following table based on the total capacity of indoor units connected at the downstream side. However, it should never exceed the
size of main pipe (Section A in Fig. 1).
Total capacity of indoor units
Less than 70
70 - 180
180 - 371
371 - 540
Gas pipe
12.7 t1.0
15.88t1.0
19.05t1.0 *
1
19.05t1.0
Liquid pipe
9.52t0.8
12.7t0.8
15.88t1.0
Total capacity at downstream
Less than 180
180 - 371
371 - 540
Branch pipe set
DIS-22-1
DIS-180-1
DIS-371-1
(c) Between branching at indoor unit side - indoor unit side: Section C in Fig. 1
According to the table of pipe size for indoor unit. However, it should never exceed the size of main pipe (Section A in Fig. 1).
(4) Selection of the branch set for indoor unit side
(a) Selection of the branch pipe set
Size of branch pipe varies depending on the capacity of connected indoor units (total capacity at
downstream). Select it from the table at right.
Request
Adjust the indoor unit and the size of branch pipe at the indoor unit side according to the size of
pipe connected to indoor unit.
Install the branch joint (both of gas and fuid) so that it will become Horizontal branching or
Vertical branching.
(b) Selection of the header set
Connect a plugged pipe (feld provided) at the branch point (indoor unit connecting side)
depending on he number of units connected.
For the size of plugged pipe, refer to the header set (optional item).
Request
Adjust the header and indoor unit pipes to the size of pipes for connected indoor units.
Install the header at the gas side to be Horizontal branching and, at the fuid side, that the
branch is provided at the downstream side.
Header is not allowed to receive indoor units of 224 or 280.
Capacity
22, 28
36, 45, 56
71, 80, 90, 112, 140, 160
224
280
Gas pipe
9.52t0.8
12.7t0.8
15.88t1.0
19.05t1.0
22.22t1.0
Liquid pipe
6.35t0.8
9.52t0.8
Indoor unit
Vertical
Floor surface Floor surface Floor surface Floor surface
Horizontal
Total capacity at downstream
Less than 180
180 - 371
371 - 540
Header set model
HEAD4-22-1
HEAD6-180-1
HEAD8-371-1
Number of branches
Max. 4 branches
Max. 6 branches
Max. 6 branches
-
252
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(2j Field piping work
|mportaot
AAttached pipe connecting outlet at refrigerant gas side
BPipe connection outlet at liquid refrigerant side (Slot 50x94j
CRefrigerant pipe outlet
DPower cable outlet (30j
E Power cable outlet (45j
F Refrigerant pipe connection outlet (Slot 50x94j
GPipe connection outlet at gas refrigerant side
Legend
Hook
4-2. P|p|og work
(1j Pipe connecting position and pipe outgoing direction
Front connection
Bottom connection
Right-hand side connection
Rear connection
0utdoor unit
0
3
1
5
8
4
30
G
A
F
B
5
4
9
6
Drain outlet (2Oj
Figure in is for 885
0ver 1.5m
Pipe fastening position
B
G 0
4
6
3
5
5
5
3
5
4
9
5
1
6
8
2
54
60
120
14
43
E
D
D
D
C
C
C
A
43
5
4
4
7
1
9
5
1
5
3
5
4 14
54 68
First remove the fve screws ( markj of the service panel and push it down into the direction of the arrow mark and then remove it o] pulling it toward ]ou.
The pipe can oe laid in an] of the following directions. side right, front, rear and downward.
Remove a knock-out plate provided on the pipe penetration to open a minimum necessar] area and attach an edging material supplied as an accessor] o] cutting it to an appropriate
length oefore la]ing a pipe.
ln la]ing pipes on the installation site, cut off the casing's half olank that covers a hole for pipe penetration with nippers.
lf there is a risk of small animals entering from the pipe penetration part, close the part with some sealing material or the like (to oe arranged on the installer's partj.
In the case of an installation using a collective drain s]stem, use a port other than the oottom one to take out caoles and pipes. lf the oottom port is used, seal it thoroughl] so
that drain water ma] not spill out.
Use an eloow (to oe arranged on the user's partj to connect control valves to the piping.
ln anchoring piping on the installation site, give 1.5m or a longer distance oetween an outdoor unit and an anchoring point where the piping is secured as illustrated oelow. (A
failure to ooserve this instruction ma] result in a pipe fracture depending on a method of isolating viorations emplo]ed.j
The pipe should oe anchored ever] 1.5m or less to isolate the vioration.
H
Flare nut parallel side
measurement. H (mmj
O.85
9.52
12.7
15.88
Copper
pipe outer
diameter
17
22
2O
29

Flared pipe end. A (mmj Copper pipe protrusion for faring. B (mmj
O.85
9.52
12.7
15.88
Copper
pipe outer
diameter
O
-O.4
9.1
18.2
1O.O
19.7
O.85
9.52
12.7
15.88
Copper
pipe outer
diameter
ln the case of a rigid (clutchj t]pe
with an R41OA tool with a conventional tool
OO.5 O.71.8
0A0T|0h
lf ]ou tighten it without using douole spanners, ]ou ma] deform the
service valve, which can cause an infow of nitrogen gas into the
outdoor unit. Please take care so that installed pipes ma] not touch components within a unit.
00r|og the p|pe |osta||at|oo at s|te, keep the serv|ce va|ves sh0t a|| the t|me.
0ive s0Ihc|eot protect|oos (compressed and orazed or o] an adhesive tapej to p|pe eods so that aoy water or Iore|go matters may oot eoter the p|pes.
ln oending a pipe, oend it to the |argest poss|b|e rad|0s (at |east Io0r t|mes the p|pe d|ameter). Do not oend a pipe repeatedl] to correct its form.
An outdoor unit's pipe and refrigerant piping are to oe fare connected. Flare a pipe after engaging a fare nut onto it. A fare size for R41OA is different from that for
conventional R4O7C. Although we recommend the use of faring tools developed specifcall] for R41OA, conventional faring tools can also oe used o] adjusting the
measurement of protrusion B with a protrusion control gauge.
Be sure to use the accessor] pipe for connection to the gas operation valve. For details, refer to the installation manual of the accessor] pipe.
Tighten a fare joint securel] w|th two spaooers. 0oserve fare nut tightening torque specifed in the taole oelow.
-
253
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
254
-
'10 KX-DB-147
4-4. Add|t|ooa| charge oI reIr|geraot
Refrigerant must oe in the state of fuid when charging.
Nake sure to use a measuring device when charging the refrigerant.
when it cannot charge whole required quantit] oecause the outdoor unit is stopped, operate the unit in the test run mode and charge. (8ee 8ection 8 for the method of test run.j
0perating the unit for a long period of time with insuffcient quantit] of refrigerant could cause malfunction on the compressor. (when charging while operating the unit,
especiall], complete the charge within 8O minutes.j
This unit contains 11.5 kg of refrigerant.
Calculate necessar] quantit] of additional charge with the following formula, and record the quantit] of additionall] charged refrigerant on the refrigerant quantit] list provided
on the oack of service panel.
Charge the additional refrigerant depending on the size and length of fuid pipe. Determine the quantit] of additional charge o] rounding the second place after decimal point,
which means in the unit of O.1 kg.
(2j Air purge
Perform the air purge from ooth the operation check joints at fuid side and gas side.
This product uses R410A. Take care of the following points.
To avoid contamination with different type of oil, use separate tools depending on the type of refrigerant. lt is prohibited especially to
use the gauge manifold and the charge hose for different types of refrigerant (R22, R407Cj.
Use a reverse fow prevention adaptor to prevent the contamination of refrigerant system with vacuum pump oil.
<work fow>
8IFOUIFOFFEMFQPJOUFSPGWBDVVNHBVHFIBTDSFQUVQJUNFBOTUIBUUIFSFJTNPJTUVSFJOPSMFBLBHF
GSPNUIFTZTUFN*EFOUJGZBOESFQBJSUIFMFBLJOHQPTJUJPOBOEUIFOQFSGPSNUIFBJSQVSHFBHBJO
0perate the vacuum pump for more than 1 hour
after achieving -1O kPa or under (-7O5 mmHg or
under.
After letting it alone for
more than 1 hour, the
pointer needle of vacuum
gauge should not creep
up.
$"65*0/
lnsuffcient degree of vacuum
causes a capacit] shortage,
clogging o] remaining moisture
or malfunction of compressor
l8. Tot al length of o15.88 pipes (mj, l4. Total length of o12.7 pipes (mj
l5. Total length of oO.952 pipes (mj, lO. Total length of oO.85 pipes (mj
This product uses R41OA. Take care of the following points.
To avoid contamination with different t]pe of oil, use separate tools depending on the t]pe of refrigerant. lt is prohioited especiall] to use the gauge manifold and the
charge hose for different t]pes of refrigerant (R22, R4O7Cj.
T]pe of refrigerant is indicated with the color painted on the container (Yellow for R14OAj. 8uffcient care must oe taken to use correct refrigerant onl].
hever use a charge c]linder. 0therwise, the composition of refrigerant ma] change when introducing R41OA into the c]linder.
Nake sure to charge the refrigerant in the state of fuid.
8eg0est
Record the refrigerant quantit] calculated oased
on the piping length in the refrigerant quantit]
list provided on the oack of service panel.
4-5. heat |os0|at|oo aod mo|st0re coodeosat|oo prooI
Refrigerant pipe size
Additional charge quantity(kg/m
15.88
0.17
12.7
0.11
9.52
0.054
6.35
0.022
Remark
5. 0ra|oage
Drain eloow (1 pcj
Drain grommet (8 pcs.j
Commercial general purpose hard
pol]caroonate pipe, VP-1O
where water drained from the outdoor unit ma] freeze, connect the drain pipe using optional drain eloow and
drain grommet.
0utdoor unit has 4 drain outlets on the oottom.
when guiding drain water to a scupper, etc, install the parts on a fat stand (optional itemj, olocks, or other.
Connect the drain eloow as shown o] the fgure. 8eal remaining holes with grommets.
when draining water collectivel], use holes for wires and pipes opened other than on the oottom. when this is
impracticaole, suffcientl] seal the drain pipe to prevent water leakage.
C
o
m
p
l
e
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
i
r

t
i
g
h
t
n
e
s
s

t
e
s
t
8
t
a
r
t

o
f

a
i
r

p
u
r
g
e
C
o
m
p
l
e
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
i
r

p
u
r
g
e
D
e
g
r
e
e

o
f

v
a
c
u
u
m

c
h
e
c
k
R
e
f
r
i
g
e
r
a
n
t

c
h
a
r
g
e
Additional charge quantit]kg2.5l8O.17l4O.11l5O.O54lOO.O22
8tandard additional refrigerant quantit]
Nake sure to charge this quantit] in addition
to the charge quantit] for the refrigerant piping.
Charge quantit] for the refrigerant piping
Attached on the oack of service panel.
Refrigerant quantit] laoel
0A0T|0h
Nake sure to enter the data. The data is required at maintenance or service.
(1j Dress refrigerant pipes (ooth gas and liquid pipesj for heat insulation and prevention of dew condensation.
lmproper heat insulation/anti-dew dressing can result in a water leak or dripping causing damage to household effects, etc.
(2j Use a heat insulating material that can withstand 12O or a higher temperature. Poor heat insulating capacit] can cause
heat insulation proolems or caole deterioration.
All gas pipes must oe securel] heat insulated in order to prevent damage from dripping water that comes from the
condensation formed on them during a cooling operation or personal injur] from ourns oecause their surface can reach quite
a high temperature due to discharged gas fowing inside during a heating operation.
wrap indoor units' fare joints with heat insulating parts (pipe coverj for heat insulation (ooth gas and liquid pipesj.
0ive heat insulation to ooth gas and liquid side pipes. Bundle a heat insulating material and a pipe tightl] together so that
no gaps ma] oe left oetween them and wrap them together with a connecting caole o] a dressing tape.
Although it is verifed in a test that this air conditioning unit shows satisfactor] performance under Jl8 condensation test
conditions, ooth gas and liquid pipes need to oe dressed with 2Omm, or over, heat insulation materials additionall] aoove
the ceiling where relative humidit] exceeds 7O7.
wires for connecting indoor
and outdoor units
Exterior tape
0as piping
lnsulation
liquid piping
Band (accessor]j Pipe cover (accessor]j
PCB012D015L
L
-
255
-
'10 KX-DB-147
6-2. Power s0pp|y coooect|oo
6-1. w|r|og system draw|og
6. |ectr|c w|r|og
(3) 00tdoor 0o|t power s0pp|y spec|hcat|oo: 380l415V 3h~ 50hz 380V 3h~ 60hz 220V 3~ 60hz
Nodel
224KXEO
28OKXEO
885KXEO
Power source
Three-phase
88O/415V 5OHz
88OV OOHz
Caole size for
power source (mm
2
j
5.5
8
Rated current
8O
8O
8O
8O
2
2
N5
N5
54
O8
8witch capacit]
Earth leakage oreaker
8ize (mm
2
j
8crew t]pe
8crew t]pe
Power suppl] (outdoor unit sidej

0utdoor unit
Power suppl] (indoor unit sidej
0rounding work
0rounding work
Earth leakage
oreaker
Circuit oreaker
for caoling
Earth leakage
oreaker
Circuit oreaker
for caoling
lndoor unit
Remote controller wire
XY
XY
XY
XY
XY
XY

L1L2L3
or
L1L2L3N
1
2
1
2
8ignal wire (oetween indoor unitsj
Remote
controller
11
8ignal wire (oetween outdoor - indoor units j
(Example of comoinationj
8eg0est
(aj Taole at left shows the standard specifcation. Use the power suppl] of single phase 22O/24OV.
(oj Distance in the taole shows the value ootained when indoor units are connected in series. The taole shows the wire size
and the distance provided voltage drop is within 27 for each total current of indoor unit. where the current exceeds the
values in the taole, change the wire size according to the extension wiring regulations.
(cj wires connected to indoor units are allowed up to 5.5 mm
2
. For 8 mm
2
or more, use a dedicated pull oox and oranch to
indoor units with 5.5 mm
2
or less.
(dj Values in the taole don't include electric heaters. when an] electric heater is assemoled, ooth the power suppl]
specifcation and the wiring specifcation oecome different.
(ej terminal on the terminal olock is specifed to connect onl] an optional auxiliar] heater (power suppl] for heaterj.
Noulded-case circuit oreaker (Aj
Rated current 8witch capacit]
Earth wire
Please use a shielded caole.
wire length
(mj
wire length
(mj
8OA, 8OmA
less than O.1 sec
8OA, 8OmA
less than O.1 sec
Nodel
224KXEON
28OKXEON
885KXEON
Power source
Three-phase
22OV OOHz
Caole size for
power source (mm
2
j
N5
N5
N5
14
14
14
48
45
44
5O
5O
5O
5O
5O
5O
8.5
8.5
8.5
8ize (mm
2
j
Earth wire
5OA, 1OOmA less than O.1 sec
Electrical installation work must oe performed o] an electrical installation service provider qualifed o] a power provider of the countr].
Electrical installation work must oe executed according to the technical standards and other regulations applicaole to electrical installations in the countr].
P|ease |osta|| ao earth |eakage breaker w|tho0t Ia||. The installation of an earth leakage oreaker is compulsor] in order to prevent electric shocks or fre accidents.
(8ince this unit emplo]s inverter control, please 0se ao |mp0|se w|thstaod|og type to prevent an earth leakage oreaker's false actuation.j
P|ease oote
aj Use onl] copper wires.
Do not use an] suppl] cord lighter than one specifed in parentheses for each t]pe oelow.
- oraided cord (code designation OO245 lEC 51j, if allowed in the relevant part 2,
- ordinar] tough ruooer sheathed cord (code designation OO245 lEC 58j,
- fat twin tinsel cord (code designation OO227 lEC 41j
- ordinar] pol]vin]l chloride sheathed cord (code designation OO227 lEC 58j.
Please do not use an]thing lighter than pol]chloroprene sheathed fexiole cord (cord designation OO245 lEC57j for suppl] cords of parts of appliances for outdoor use.
oj 0se separate power s0pp||es Ior the |odoor aod o0tdoor 0o|ts.
cj The power s0pp||es Ior |odoor 0o|ts |o the same system sho0|d t0ro oo aod oII s|m0|taoeo0s|y.
dj 0round the unit. Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod or telephone grounding wire.
A grounding wire must oe connected oefore connecting the power caole. Provide a grounding wire longer than the power caole.
lf improperl] grounded, an electric shock or malfunction ma] result.
ej The |osta||at|oo oI ao |mp0|se w|th staod|og type earth |eakage breaker |s oecessary. A failure to install an earth leakage oreaker can result in an accident such as an electric shock or a fre.
Do not turn on the power until the electrical work is completed. Be sure to turn off the power when servicing.
f j Please do not use a condensive capacitor for power factor improvement under an] circumstances. (lt does not improve power factor, while it can cause an aonormal overheat accidentj
gj For power suppl] caoles, use conduits.
hj Please do oot |ay e|ectroo|c cootro| cab|es (remote cootro| aod s|goa||og ||oes) aod other h|gh c0rreot cab|es together o0ts|de the 0o|t. la]ing them together can result in malfunctioning or a
failure of the unit due to electric noises.
i j Power caoles and signaling lines must alwa]s oe connected to the terminal olock and secured o] caole fastening clamps provided in the unit.
j j Fasten caoles so that the] ma] not touch the piping, etc.
kj wheo cab|es are coooected, p|ease make s0re that a|| e|ectr|ca| compooeots w|th|o the e|ectr|ca| compooeot box are oot Iree or oot |oose oo the term|oa| coooect|oo and then attach the
cover securel]. (lmproper cover attachment can result in malfunctioning or a failure of the unit, if water penetrates into the oox.j
l j Nake sure to use circuit oreakers (earth leakage oreaker and circuit oreakerj of proper capacit].
Use of oreakers of larger capacit] could result in trouole on components or fre accident.
The circuit oreaker should isolate all poles under over current.
mj lnstall isolator or disconnect switch on the power suppl] wiring in accordance with the local codes and regulations. The isolator should oe locked in 0FF state in accordance with EhOO2O4-1.
nj After maintenance, all wiring, wiring ties and the like, should oe returned to their original state and wiring route, and the necessar] clearance from all metal parts should oe secured.
22O/24OV 5OHz
22OV OOHz
0A0T|0h
lf the earth leakage oreaker is exclusivel] for
ground fault protection, then ]ou will need to
install a circuit oreaker for wiring work.
*Do not connect h-phase wire to the unit
when the power suppl] is 8-phase and 4-wire.
Round crimp
contact terminal
Crimp
contact terminal
Diameter of a caole.thin
Diameter of a caole.thick
wire
(1) Nethod oI |ead|og o0t cab|es
As shown on the drawing in 8ection 4-2, caoles can oe laid through the front, right, left or oottom casing.
ln wiring on the installation site, cut off a half-olank covering a penetration of the casing with nippers.
ln the case of an installation using a collective drain s]stem, use a port other than the oottom one to take out caoles and pipes. lf the oottom port is used, seal it thoroughl] so that drain water ma]
not spill out.
(2) hotab|||a |o coooect|og power cab|es
Connect the ground wire oefore ]ou connect the power caole. when ]ou connect a grounding wire to a terminal olock, use a
grounding wire longer than the power caole so that it ma] not oe suoject to tension.
Do not turn on power until installation work is completed. Turn off power to the unit oefore ]ou service the unit.
Ensure that the unit is properl] grounded.
Alwa]s connect power caoles to the power terminal olock.
To connect a caole to the power terminal olock, use a round crimp contact terminal.
lf two caoles are to oe connected to one terminal, arrange caoles in such a manner that ]ou put their crimp contact terminals
together oack to oack. Further, put the thinner caole aoove the thicker one in arranging caoles for such connection.
Use specifed wires in wiring, and fasten them securel] in such a manner that the terminal olocks are not suoject to external force.
ln fastening a screw of a terminal olock, use a correct-size driver.
Fastening a screw of a terminal olock with excessive force can oreak the screw.
when electrical installation work is completed, make sure that all electrical components within the electrical component oox are free
of loose connector coupling or terminal connection.
aj The method of la]ing caoles has oeen determined pursuant to the Japanese indoor wiring regulations (JEAC8OO1j.
(Please adapt it to the regulations in effect in each countr]j
oj wire length in the taole aoove is the value for when the indoor unit is connect to the power caole in series also the wire size and minimum length when the power drop is
less than 27 are shown. lf the current exceeds the value in the taole aoove, change the wire size according to the indoor wiring regulations.
(Please adapt it to the regulations in effect in each countr]j
cj For details, please refer to the installation manual supplied with the indoor unit.
P|ease oote
Terminal olock
8ignal line (mm
j
2OA, 8OmA
less than O.1 sec
2
8.5
5.5
5.5
8OA, 8OmA
less than O.1 sec
21 2O
8O 2 core O.75
88
24
2O
8O
Rated current 8witch capacit]
outdoor-indoor indoor-indoor
Comoined total capacit]
of indoor units
Caole size for
power source(mm
2
j
wire length(mj
less than 7A
less than 11A
less than 12A
less than 1OA
(4) |odoor 0o|t power so0rce (00tdoor 0o|t |s aoother power so0rce.) & s|goa| ||oe
88O/415V 8h 5OHz
88OV 8h OOHz
22OV 8 OOHz
22OV 8h OOHz*
8
-
256
-
'10 KX-DB-147
The communication protocol can oe choosen from following two t]pes. 0ne of them is the conventional 8uperlink (hereinafter previous 8lj and the other is the new 8uperlink
(hereinafter new 8lj . These two communication protocols have the following advantages and restrictions, so please choose a desiraole one meeting ]our installation conditions
such as connected indoor units and centralized controller. when signal caoles are connected into a network involving outdoor units, indoor units or centralized control equipment
that do not support new 8l, please select communications in the previous 8l mode, even if the refrigerant s]stem is separated from theirs.
(1j when one outdoor unit is used.
(1j The signal lines can also oe connected using the method shown oelow.
lndoor and outdoor signal lines do not have a polarit].
An] of the connections in the following illustration can oe made.
(2j when plural outdoor units are used
0utdoor unit 0utdoor unit
8ignal line
Refrigerant pipe
hetwork connector
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor unit
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
0utdoor signal line
terminal olock
lndoor signal line
terminal olock
loop wiring prohioited.
The signal lines cannot form a
loop, so the wirings shown as
.......
in the diagram are prohioited.
|mportaot
Connect the signal line oetween indoor unit and outdoor unit to A1 and B1.
Connect the signal line oetween outdoor units to A2 and B2.
Please use a shielded caole for a signal line and connect a shielding earth at all the indoor units and outdoor units.
1 B1
A1B1 A2B2
A1
B1
A1
B1

A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

S|goa| cab|es are Ior 00 5 V. hever coooect w|res Ior 220l240 V or 380l415 V. Protective fuse on the PCB will trip.
Confrm that signal caoles are prevented from appl]ing 22O/24O V or 88O/415 V
Before turning the power on, check the resistance on the signal caole terminal olock. lf it is less than 1OO0, power suppl] caoles ma] oe connected to the signal caole
terminal olock.
Staodard res|staoce va|0e = 46,000l(h0mber oI F0AkX4 Ser|es 0o|ts coooected 5) + (h0mber oI F0kX6 Ser|es 0o|ts coooected x 9)
lf the resistance value is less than 1OO0, disconnect the signal caoles temporaril] to divide to more than one network, to reduce the numoer of indoor units on the same
network, and check each network
0utdoor unit setting (8w5-5j
ho. of connectaole indoor units
ho. of connectaole outdoor unitsin a network
ho. of connectaole outdoor units
8ignal caole (furthest lengthj
Connectaole units to a network
0h
Nax. 48
Nax. 48
Up to 1OOOm
Up to 1OOOm
Units not supporting new 8l (FDAKXE4 seriesj
Units supporting new 8l (FDKXEO seriesj
Can oe used together.
0FF (Factor] defaultj
Nax. 128
Nax. 82
Up to 2,OOO m for wires other than shielding wire
Up to 1,5OO m for O.75 mm
2
shielding wire (NVV8j
Up to 1,OOO m for 1.25 mm
2
shielding wire (NVV8j
Up to 1OOOm
Units supporting new 8l (FDKXEO seriesj
Conventional communication protocol (previous 8lj Communication protocol hew communication protocol (new 8lj
hote. For FDT224 and 28O models, calculate the numoer of units taking 1 indoor unit as 2 units for the sake of communication.
hetwork connector
Earth wire is
giving slack.
wiring laoel
The wiring laoel is attached on the oack of the service panel.
0utgoing caole direction
Fix the caoles not to exert external force to the terminal connection.
As like the refrigerant pipe, it can oe let out in an] of 4 directions of right-hand side,
front, rear and oottom.
0ive adequate slack to caoles in fastening them.
Fix power caoles separatel] from signal caoles.
wiring clamp
12.5 mm or less
7 mm or less
length (mj
within 1OO - 2OO
within - 8OO
within - 4OO
within - OOO
wire size
O.5
2
O.75
2
1.25
2
2.O
2
|odoor aod o0tdoor 0o|ts s|goa| cab|es
Power cab|e aod s|goa| cab|e coooect|oo
8eg0est
when connecting to the power suppl] terminal olock,
use the crimp terminals for N5 as shown at right.
when connecting to the signal terminal olock, use
the crimp terminals for N8.5 as shown at right.
8emote cootro||er w|r|og spec|hcat|oos
For the remote controller the standard wire is O.8 mm
2
. The max. length
is up to OOO m. when the wire is more than 1OO m long, use the wire
shown in the taole.
Use 8-core wires for FDAKXE4 or 2-core wires for FDKXEO.
6-3. how to coooect s|goa| cab|es
9
-
257
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Address sett|og methods
The following address setting methods can oe used. The procedure for automatic address setting is different from the conventional one.
Please use the automatic address setting function after reading this manual carefull].
This control s]stem controls the controllers of more than one air conditioner's outdoor unit, indoor unit and remote control unit through communication control, using the microcomputers ouilt in
the respective controllers. Address setting needs to oe done for ooth outdoor and indoor units. Turn on power in the order of the outdoor units and then the indoor units.
0se 1 m|o0te as the r0|e oI th0mb Ior ao |oterva| betweeo them.
The communication protocol can oe chosen from following two t]pes. 0ne of them is the conventional communication protocol (previous 8lj and the other is the new communication protocol (new
8lj. These two communication protocols have their own features and restrictions as shown o] Taole O-8. 8elect them according the indoor units and the centralized control to oe connected.
when signal caoles are connected into a network involving outdoor units, indoor units or centralized control equipment that do not support new 8l, please select communications in the previous 8l
mode, even if the refrigerant s]stem is separated from theirs.
wheo comm0o|cat|oo |s estab||shed aIter sett|og addresses, check the comm0o|cat|oo protoco| w|th the 7 segmeot d|sp|ay paoe| oI the o0tdoor 0o|t.
8ignal line
CA8E 1 CA8E 2
CA8E 8 CA8E 4
Refrigerant pipe
hetwork connector hetwork connector
hetwork connector hetwork connector
0utdoor unit 0utdoor unit 0utdoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit
lndoor unit address setting
OOO127[47|
OOO
OOO
OO81[47|
49
49
OO47
49
OO47
49
OO81[47|
49
OO81
0utdoor unit address setting
OO47
49

0 1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
0 1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
Address ho. sett|og
8et 8w1 through 4 and 8w5-2 provided on the PCB and 8w1 & 2 provided on the outdoor unit PCB as shown in the drawings oelow.
1 Do not connect the signal line oetween outdoor units to A1 and B1. This ma] interrupt proper address setting. (Case 8j
Do not connect the signal line oetween indoor unit and outdoor unit to A2 and B2. This ma] interrupt proper address setting. (Case 4j
2 ln Case 2, automatic address setting is not availaole. 8et addresses manuall].
A1B1 A2B2
A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2
A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

A1B1 A2B2
A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2
A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2
S0mmary oI address sett|og methods (hg0res |o [ ] sho0|d be 0sed w|th prev|o0s SL)
Do not set numoers other than those shown in the taole, or an error ma] oe generated.
hote. when units supporting new 8l are added to a network using previous 8l such as one involving FDAKXE4 series units, choose previous 8l for the communication protocol and set addresses manuall].
8ince the models FDT224 and 28O have 2 PCBs per unit, set different indoor unit ho. and 8w on each PCB.
An outdoor unit ho., which is used to identif] which outdoor unit and indoor units are connected in a refrigerant s]stem, is set on outdoor unit PCB and indoor unit PCB. 0ive the same outdoor unit
ho. to all outdoor unit and indoor units connected in same refrigerant s]stem.
An indoor unit ho. is used to identif] individual indoor units. Assign a unique numoer that is not assigned to an] other indoor units on the network.
lncorrect caole connection
(The signal line oetween outdoor units is connected to A1 and B1j
lncorrect caole connection
(The signal line oetween indoor unit and outdoor units is connected to A2 and B2j
Nanual address setting
(previous 8l/new 8lj
Units supporting new 8l Units h0T supporting new 8l
8w1 (8w8j 8w2 (8w4j
For ten's place For one's place
B] inserting a fat driver
(precision screw driverj into this
groove and turn the arrow to
point a desired numoer.
lndoor PCB
0utdoor PCB
8w1, 2 (oluej
8w8, 4 (greenj
8w5-2
8w1, 2 (greenj
For setting indoor ho. (The ten's and one'sj
For setting outdoor ho. (The ten's and one'sj
lndoor ho. switch (The hundred's Placej [0FF . O, 0h . 1|
For setting outdoor ho. (The ten's and one'sj
Automatic address setting for
multiple refrigerant s]stems installation
(with new 8l onl]j
Automatic address setting for
single refrigerant s]stem installation
(previous 8l/new 8lj
lndoor ho. switch 0utdoor ho. switch 0utdoor ho. switch lndoor ho. switch 0utdoor ho. switch 0utdoor ho. switch
7-1. 0o|t address sett|og
Communication protocol
Address setting method
0K
1
2
0K
0K
0K
0K
0K
0K
0K
0K
new 8l previous 8l
Automatic Nanual Automatic Nanual
7. 00hT80LL8 STT|h6S
Case 1
Case 2
when signal lines linking plural refrigerant s]stems are provided oetween outdoor units.
(when the network connector is disconnected, refrigerant s]stems are separated each otherj
when signal lines linking plural refrigerant s]stems are provided oetween indoor units.
when onl] one refrigerant s]stem is involved (signal lines do not link plural refrigerant s]stemsj
when plural refrigerant s]stems
are linked with signal lines
(e.g., to implement centralized
controlj
1O
-
258
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(1) |o the case oI a s|og|e reIr|geraot system |osta||at|oo (0enerall] applicaole to new 8l/previous 8l, use fgures in [ | with previous 8l.j
8et as follows oefore ]ou turn on power.
Nake sure that the 00tdoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch is set to 49 (Iactory sett|og)
Nake sure that the |odoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch is set to 000 [|o the case oI prev|o0s SL: 49] (Iactory sett|og)
Turn on power in order from the outdoor unit to indoor units. 0ive a one-minute or longer interval for them. Unlike the procedure set out in (2j oelow, ]ou need not change settings from the 7
segment displa] panel.
Nake sure that the numoer of indoor units indicated on the 7 segment displa] panel agrees with the numoer of the indoor units that are actuall] connected to the refrigerant s]stem.
(2) |o the case oI a m0|t|p|e reIr|geraot systems |osta||at|oo (Applicaole to new 8l onl]. ln the case of previous 8l, set addresses with some other method.j
(This option is availaole when the interconnection wiring among refrigerant s]stems is on the outdoor side and new 8l is chosen as the communication protocol.j
Address setting procedure (perform these steps for each outdoor unitj
[8TEP1| (ltems set oefore turning on powerj
8et the 00tdoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch to a numoer 00 - 31. 8et a unique numoer o] avoiding the numoers assigned to other outdoor units on the network.
Nake sure that the |odoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch is set to 000 (Iactory sett|og)
lsolate the present refrigerant s]stem from the network.
Disengage the oetwork coooectors (wh|te 2P) of the outdoor units. (Turning on power without isolating each refrigerant s]stem will result in erroneous address setting.j
[8TEP2| (Power on and automatic address settingj
Turn on power to the outdoor unit
Turn on power in order from the outdoor unit to indoor units. 0ive a one-minute or longer interval for them.
8elect and enter "1" in P81 on the 7 segment displa] panel of each outdoor unit to input "Automatic address start."
lnput a starting address and the numoer of connected indoor units.
lnput a starting address in P82 on the 7 segment displa] panel of each outdoor unit.
when a starting address is entered, the displa] indication will switch oack to the "humoer of Connected lndoor Units lnput" screen.
lnput the numoer of connected indoor units from the 7 segment displa] panel of each outdoor unit. Please input the numoer of connected indoor units for each outdoor unit. (You can input it
from P88 on the 7 segment displa] panel.jwhen the numoer of connected indoor units is entered, the 7 segment displa] panel indication will switch to "AUX" and start fickering.
[8TEP8| (Automatic address setting completion checkj
lndoor unit address determination
when the indoor unit addresses are all set, the 7 segment displa] panel indication will switch to "AUE" and start fickering.
lf an error is detected in this process, the displa] will show "A."
Check the 7 segment displa] panel of each outdoor unit.
Depending on the numoer of connected indoor units, it ma] take abo0t 10 m|o0tes oefore the indoor unit addresses are all set.
[8TEP4| (hetwork defnition settingj
hetwork connection
when ]ou have confrmed an "AUE" indication on the displa] of each outdoor unit, eogage the oetwork coooectors again.
hetwork polarit] setting
AIter yo0 have made s0re that the oetwork coooectors are eogaged in , select and enter "1" in P84 on the 7 segment displa] panel of aoy o0tdoor 0o|t (oo oo|y 1 0o|t) to specif]
network polarit].
hetwork setting completion check
when the network is defned, "End" will appear on the 7 segment displa] panel. An "End" indication will go off, when some operation is made from the 7 segment displa] panel or
8 minutes after.
8et as follows oefore ]ou turn on power. Upon turning on power, the outdoor unit address is registered.
8et the 00tdoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch to a o0mber 00 - 31 [|o the case oI prev|o0s SL: 00 - 47].
8et a unique numoer o] avoiding the numoers assigned to other outdoor units on the network.
8et as follows oefore ]ou turn on power. Upon turning on power, the indoor unit address is registered.
8et the |odoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch to a o0mber 000 - 127 [|o the case oI prev|o0s SL: 00 - 47].
8et the 00tdoor 0o|t ho. sw|tch to the outdoor unit ho. of the associated outdoor unit within the range of 00 - 31 [|o the case oI prev|o0s SL: 00 - 47].
8et a unique numoer o] avoiding the numoers assigned to other indoor units on the network.
Turn on power in order from the outdoor unit to indoor units. 0ive a one-minute or longer interval for them.
* when there are some units not supporting new 8l connected in the network, set 8w5-5 to 0h to choose the previous 8l communication mode.
ln the case of previous 8l, the maximum numoer of indoor units connectaole in a network is 48.
A0tomat|c address sett|og 6eoera||y app||cab|e to oew SLlprev|o0s SL, 0se hg0res |o [ ] w|th prev|o0s SL.
Unless stated otherwise, the following procedures appl], when new 8l is chosen for the communication protocol.
when previous 8l is chosen, use fgures shown in [ | in carr]ing out these procedures.
Nao0a| address sett|og 6eoera||y app||cab|e to oew SLlprev|o0s SL, 0se hg0res |o [ ] w|th prev|o0s SL.
with new 8l, ]ou can set indoor unit addresses automaticall] even for an installation involving multiple refrigerant s]stems connected with same network, in addition to the conventional automatic
address setting of a single refrigerant s]stem installation.
However, an installation must satisf] some additional requirements such as for wiring methods, so please read this manual carefull] oefore ]ou carr] out automatic address setting.
-
259
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
260
-
'10 KX-DB-147
The switch will continuousl] change the displa] indication to the next one in ever] O.25 seconds when it is pressed for O.75 seconds or longer.
lf the Reset switch is pressed during an operation, the displa] indication returns to the one that was shown oefore the last 8et switch operation.
Even if an indoor unit ho. is changed in this mode, the registered indoor unit ho. oefore address change mode is displa]ed when [l/U 8ElECTl0h| is shown.
when "8ET C0NPlETE" is shown, indoor unit ho.'s are registered.
(2j when plural indoor units are connected to the remote controller.
when plural indoor units are connected, ]ou can change their addresses without altering their caole connection.
Address change mode
8electing an indoor unit
to oe changed address
8etting a new indoor unit ho.
1
2
8
8etting a new outdoor unit ho.
Ending the session
4
5
Press the AlR C0h Unit ho. switch for 8 seconds or longer.
Each time when ]ou press the switch, the displa] indication will oe switched.
Press the 8et switch when the displa] shows "CHAh0E ADD. "
The lowest indoor unit ho. among the indoor units connected to the remote control unit will oe shown.
Pressing the switch will change the displa] indication c]clicall] to show the unit ho.'s
of the indoor units connected to the remote controller and the unit ho.'s of the outdoor units
connected with them.
Then the address ho. of the indoor unit to oe changed is determined and the screen switches to the
displa] " 8ET l/U ADD."
8et a new indoor unit ho. with the switch.
A numoer indicated on the displa] will increase or decrease o] 1 upon pressing the or switch
respectivel].
After selecting an address, press the 8et switch. Then the address ho.of the indoor unit is determined.
The displa] will indicate the determined indoor address ho. for 2 seconds and then switch to the
" 8ET 0/U ADD." screen.
A default value shown on the displa] is the current address.
8et a new outdoor unit ho. with the switch.
A numoer indicated on the displa] will increase or decrease o] 1 upon pressing the or switch
respectivel].
After selecting an address, press the 8et switch.
Then the address of the indoor unit and outdoor unit are determined.
lf ]ou want to continue to change addresses, return to step .
lf ]ou want to end the session (and reflect new address settingsj
ln 8tep , press the switch to select "EhD ."
lf ]ou have finished changing addresses, press the 8et switch while "EhD " is shown. while new settings
are oeing transmitted, "8ET C0NPlETE" will oe indicated. Then the remote controller displa] will change to
the normal state.
lf ]ou want to end the session (without reflecting new address settingsj
Before ]ou complete the present address setting session, press the "0h/0FF" switch.
Then the displa] is change to exit from this mode and switch the displa] to the normal state.
All address settings changed in the session will oe aoorted and not reflected.
[l/U OO2] (2secj
[l/U OO2] (2sec lightingj
[ 8ET 0/U ADD.](1secj
[0/U O1 ] (Blinkj
[0/UOO]
[0/UO1 ]
[0/UO2 ]
[0/U81]
[l/U OO20/U O2](2sec lightingj
[ 8ElECT](1sec lightingj
[l/U 8ElECTl0h](lightingj
[Press the switch](1secj
[8ET C0NPlETE] (21Osec
lightingj
[EhD]
[8ET C0NPlETE] (21Osec lightingj
hormal state
[0h/0FF]
Forced termination
[ 8ElECT l/U] (1secj
[l/U OO1 0/U O1] (Blinkj
[CHAh0E ADD]
[NA8TER l/U]
[CHAh0E ADD]
[l/U OO1 0/U O1
[l/U OO2 0/U O1 ]
[l/U OO8 0/U O1 ]
[l/U O1O 0/U O1

[ 8ET l/U ADD.] (1secj
[l/U OO1 ](Blinkj
[l/U OOO]
[l/U OO1 ]
[l/U OO2 ]
[l/U 127]
Turn on power to centralized control equipment after the addresses are determined.
Turning on power in wrong order ma] result in a failure to recognize addresses.
ltem 0peration Displa]
h0T|0
8et a new outdoor unit ho. with the switch.
A numoer indicated on the displa] will increase or decrease o] 1 upon pressing the or
switch respectivel].
[l/U OOO
[l/U OO1 |
[l/U OO2 |
[l/U 127|
[l/U OO2| (2sec lightingj
[ 8ET 0/U ADD.| (1secj
[0/U O1 | (Blinkj
[l/U OO10/U O1| (1secj
[ 8ET l/U ADD.| (1secj
[l/U OO1 | (Blinkj
8et a new indoor unit ho. with the switch.
A numoer indicated on the displa] will increase or decrease o] 1 upon pressing the or
switch respectivel].
ltem
0perat|og proced0re
(1j when single indoor unit is connected to the remote controller.
Address change mode
To set a new indoor unit ho.
To set a new outdoor unit ho.
1
2
8
Press the AlR C0h ho. switch for 8 seconds or longer.
Each time when ]ou press the switch, the displa] indication will oe switched.
[0/U OO|
[0/U O1 |
[0/U O2 |
[0/U 81|
0peration Displa]
Press the 8et switch when the displa] shows "CHAh0E ADD. "
and then start the address change mode, changing the displa] indication to the "lndoor Unit ho.
8etting" screen from the currentl] assigned address.
After selecting an address, press the 8et switch, and then the indoor unit address ho. is defined.
After showing the defined indoor address ho. for 2 seconds, the displa] will change to the "0utdoor
Address ho. 8etting" screen.
The currentl] assigned address is shown as a default value.
After selecting an address, press the 8et switch, and then the outdoor unit ho. and the indoor
unit ho. are defined.
[CHAh0E ADD.|
[CHAh0E ADD.|
[NA8TER l/U|
[l/U OO2 0/U O2| (2sec lightingj
[8ET C0NPlETE| (2sec lightingj
Returns to normal condition.
[l/U OO2| (2secj
18
-
261
-
'10 KX-DB-147
7 segment displa] indication in automatic address setting

Code Contents of a displa]
P8O
P81
P82
P84
Code Contents of a displa]
Unaole to find an] indoor unit that can oe actuall] communicated with.
The numoer of the indoor units that can oe actuall] communicated with is less
than the numoer specified in P88 on the 7 segment displa] panel.
The numoer of the indoor units that can oe actuall] communicated with is
more than the numoer specified in P88 on the 7 segment displa] panel.
8tarting address (P82j + humoer of connected indoor units (P88j > 128
while some units are operating in the previous 8l mode on the network, the
automatic address setting on multiple refrigerant s]stems is attempted.
Are signal lines connected properl] without an] loose connections?
ls power for indoor units all turned on?
lnput the numoer of connected indoor units again.
Are the network connectors coupled properl]?
lnput the starting address again.
Perform manual address setting.
8eparate old 8l setting unit from the network
Arrange all units to operate in the new 8l.
Code
AOO
AO1
AO2
AO8
AO4
Contents of a displa] Please check
Contents of a displa] Cause Code
E2
E8
E11
E12
E81
E4O
Duplicating indoor unit address.
lncorrect pairing of indoor-outdoor units.
lncorrect adderess setting of indoor units.
Address setting for plural remote controllers.
lncorrect setting.
Duplicating outdoor unit address.
lncorrect manual address setting
lndoor unit address is set from plural remote controllers.
Plural outdoor units are exist as same address in same network.
Automatic address setting and manual address setting are mixed.
Automatic address setting and manual address setting are mixed.
An outdoor unit numoer that does not exist in the network is specifed
ho master unit exists in comoination outdoor unit.
ltems that are to oe set o] the customer
Communication protocolO. Previos 8l mode
1. hew 8l mode
Polarit] difinition O. hetwork polarit] not defined.
1. hetwork polarit] defined.
AUX
During automatic address setting.
X. The numoer of indoor units recognized o] the outdoor unit.
AUE lndoor unit address setting is completed normall].
End
Polarit] is defined. (Automatic addressj
Completed normall].
Automatic address start
lnput starting address 8pecif] a starting indoor unit address in automatic address setting.
(The communication plotocol is displa]ed , displa] onl]j
P88 lnput numoer of connected indoor units 8pecif] the numoer of indoor units connected in the refrigerant s]stem in automatic address setting.
7 segment displa] indication in automatic address setting.
Address setting failure indication
Error indication
-
262
-
'10 KX-DB-147
8etting value for allocation of external input function
hame Purpose (Factor] defaultj 8pecification 0perating side connector
with external input terminals closed with external input terminals open
lnvalid
lnvalid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Test run start
Cooling
Valid
lnvalid
External input Cn81
External input Cn82
External input CnG1
External input Cn02
External output CnZ1
External output CnH
External output CnY
External operation input (closed at shippingj
Demand input (8hort-circuited at shippingj
Cooling/Heating forced input (0pen at shippingj
8ilencing mode input (0pen at shippingj
8pare output (External outputj
0peration output
Error output
hon-voltage contactor (DC12Vj
DC12V output
DC12V output
DC12V output
J.8.T (hlCHlAT8Uj BO2B-XANK-1 (lFj (8hj
J.8.T (hlCHlAT8Uj BO2B-XARK-1 (lFj (8hj
J.8.T (hlCHlAT8Uj BO2B-XAEK-1 (lFj (8hj
J.8.T (hlCHlAT8Uj BO2B-XA8K-1 (lFj (8hj
N0lEX 55OO-O2A-RE
N0lEX 528O-O2A-BU
N0lEX 52OO-O2A
Valid
Valid
lnvalid
lnvalid
lnvalid
hormal
Heating
lnvalid
Valid
"O" . External operation input
"1" . Demand input
"2" . Cooling/heating forced input
"8" . 8ilent mode 1 *1
"4" . 8pare
"5" . 0utdoor fan snow guard control input
"O" . Test run external input 1 (equivalent to 8w5-1j
"7" . Test run external input 2 (equivalent to 8w5-2j
"8" . 8ilent mode 2 *2
"9" . 2 stage demand input
B] changing the allocation of external input functions (PO7-19j on the 7-segment, functions of external
input terminals ma] oe selected. lnputting signals to external input terminals enaole the following functions.
"O" . 0peration output
"1" . Error output
"2" . Compressor 0h output
"8" . Fan 0h output
"4 - 9" . 8pare
The external output function of CnZ1 can oe changed o]
changing the setting in POO on the 7 segment displa] panel.
Control selecting method Content of control
7-2. Se|ect|oo sw|tch|og
7-3. xteroa| |op0t aod o0tp0t term|oa|s spec|hcat|oos
*1 Control is switched when ooth the allocation of external input function (PO7-1Oj and 8w are changed.
(Example. To use Cn81 for the input of forced cooling mode, set PO7 at 2 and 8w8-7 at 0h. To use Cn82 for the input of forced cooling mode, set PO8 at 2 and 8w8-7 at 0h.j
*2 ln the energ] saving mode, the capacit] restriction oecomes effective even if no signals are input at external input terminals.
*1 Valid/invalid is changed depending on outdoor temperature.
*2 lt is alwa]s Valid, regardless of outdoor temperature.
8w setting on PCB
8w5-5
J18. Closed (Factor] defaultj, J18. 0pen
P on 7-segment
8w8-7 to 0h=1 *1
8w5-1 to 0h + 8w5-2 to 0h
8w5-1 to 0h + 8w5-2 to 0FF
Cooling test run
Heating test run
Communication method selection 0h. Previous 8l communication, 0FF. hew 8l communication
External input switing (Cn81, Cn82 onl]j Closed. level input, 0pen. Pulse input
Defrost recover temperature Closed. normal, 0pen. cold weather district
Defrost start temperature Closed. normal, 0pen. cold weather district
0utdoor unit fan snow protection control 0h time setting - 8O sec (at shippingj 1O, 8O-OOO sec
8ilencing mode setting O (at shippingj - 8. larger values for larger effect
Allocation of external output (CnZ1j
Allocation of external input (Cn81j
8pare
Energ] saving mode *2
2 stage demand mode
0FF. Disaoled (at shippingj
OOO, O4O, OOO, O8O [7|
Pump down operation
0peration priorit] selection
8w4-5.0FF, 8w4-O.0FF*1 8O7 (Factor] defaultj
8w4-5.0h , 8w4-O.0FF*1 OO7
8w4-5.0FF, 8w4-O.0h*1 4O7
8w4-5.0h , 8w4-O.0h*1 OO7
Close the fuid operation valve on outdoor unit and set as follows.
(1j 8w5-2 on PCB to 0h
Forced cooling mode
(lt can oe fxed at cooling with external input terminals open, or at heating with them short-circuited.j
8et external input function
allocation to "2" *1
8et allocation of external
input function to "1" *1
lnputting signals to external input terminals selects the demand mode.
(J18 short-circuited. level input, J18 open. Pulse inputj
O. First push priorit] (at shippingj
1. last push priorit]
0utdoor unit fan snow protection control O. Control disaoled (at shippingj
1. Control enaoled
PO1
PO2
PO8
PO4
PO5
POO
PO7
PO8
PO9
P1O
P11
Controls of outdoor unit ma] oe selected as follows using the dip switches on the PCB and P on the 7-segment.
To change P on the 7-segment, hold down 8w8 (increasing a numoer shown on the 7 segment displa] panel. one's placej, 8w9 (increasing a numoer shown on the 7 segment
displa] panel. tens placej and 8w7 (Data write/Enterj.
-
263
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(1j Nake s0re that a meas0remeot betweeo the power s0pp|y term|oa| b|ock aod gro0od, wheo meas0red w|th a 500V megger tester, |s greater thao 1 N.
(2j when the resistance of the signaling line terminal olock is 1OO0 or less oefore turning the power on, the power caoles ma] oe connected to the signaling line terminal olock.
Check the wiring referring to the standard resistance value of O-8.
(8j 8e s0re t0ro 0h the power s0pp|y to s0pp|y power to the craok case heater 6 ho0rs beIore operat|oo.
After suppl]ing the power to the crank case heater, the compressor ma] not start unless the time mentioned aoove elapses. (For protection of compressorj
ln such occasion, the 7-segment lED shows "dl". wait till the temperature in the compressor rises suffcientl] after turning power on to the crank case heater,
oefore starting the test run.
(4j Nake s0re that the bottom oI the compressor cas|og |s warm.
(5j Be sure to full] open the service valves (liquid, gasj for the outdoor unit.
0perating the outdoor unit with the valves closed ma] damage the compressor.
(Oj 0oohrm that the power |s s0pp||ed to a|| |odoor 0o|ts. |t co0|d ca0se tro0b|e |I there |s aoy |odoor 0o|t wh|ch |s oot powered.
8. TST 0P8AT|0h Ah0 T8AhSF8
9. 0A0T|0hS F08 S8V|0|h6 (Ior 8410A aod compat|b|e mach|oes)
(1j To avoid mixing of different t]pes of oil, use separate tools for each t]pe of refrigerant.
(2j To avoid moisture from oeing aosoroed o] the ice machine oil, the time for when the refrigerant circuit is open should oe kept as short as possiole.
(within 1O min. is ideal.j
(8j For other piping work, airtighteness testing , vacuuming, and refrigerant charging, refer to section 4, REFRl0ERAhT PlPlh0.
(4j Diagnostic lnspection Procedures
For the meanings of failure diagnosis messages, please refer to the technical manual.
(5j 7-segment lED indication
Data are indicated when so chosen with the indication selector switch. For the details of indication, please refer to the technical manual.
(Oj lnternal wiring
After maintenance, all wiring, wiring ties and the like, should oe returned to their original state and wiring route, and the necessar] clearance from all metal parts should oe
secured.
(2) Nethod oI start|og a test r0o Ior a coo||og operat|oo Irom ao o0tdoor 0o|t: p|ease operate a remote cootro| 0o|t accord|og to the Io||ow|og steps.
(aj 8tart of a cooling test run
0perate the unit o] pressing the 8TART/8T0P outton.
8elect the "C00llh0" mode with the N0DE outton.
Press the TE8T RUh outton for 8 seconds or longer.
The screen displa] will oe switched from "8elect with lTEN ""Determine with 8ET ""Cooling test run."
when the 8ET outton is pressed while "Cooling test run " is displa]ed, a cooling test run will start. The screen displa] will oe switched to "C00llh0 TE8T RUh."
(oj Termination of a cooling test run
when the 8TART/8T0P outton or the "TENP 8ET " outton is pressed, a cooling test run will oe terminated.
(1) Test r0o Irom ao o0tdoor 0o|t.
whether Cn81 is set to 0h or 0FF, ]ou can start a test run o] using the 8w5-1 and 8w5-2 switches provided on the outdoor unit PCB.
8elect the test run mode frst.
Please set 8w5-2 to 0h for a cooling test run or 0FF for a heating test run. (lt is set to 0FF at the factor] for shipmentj
Turning 8w5-1 from 0FF to 0h next will cause all connected indoor units to start.
when a test run is completed, please set 8w5-1 to 0FF.
hote. During a test run, an indoor unit cannot oe operated from the remote control unit (to change settingsj. ("Under centralized control" is indicatedj
0A0T|0h
Please make sure that the service valves (gas, liquidj are full open oefore a test run. Conducing a test run with an] of them
in a closed position can result in a compressor failure.
After completing the installation and test run, explain methods of use and maintenance to the customer, referring to the lnstruction Nanual. Ask the customer to keep the
installation manual safel] together with the lnstruction Nanual.
lnstruct the customer that the power should not oe turned off even if the unit is not to oe used for a long time. This will enaole operation of the air conditioner an] time.
(8ince the compressor oottom is warmed o] the crank case heater, seasonal compressor trouole can oe prevented.j
8-1. 8eIore start|og operat|oo
8-2. Test r0o
8-3. TraosIer
-

2
6
4

-

'
1
0

K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
7
.
5

M
e
t
h
o
d

f
o
r

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
n
g

t
h
e

a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
y

p
i
p
e
Method for connecting the accessory pipe
Be sure to use the accessory pipe to connect the operation valve on the
gas side with the field pipe.
Table 1 Parts used for the connecting pipe assembly
Table 2 Length and specification of straight pipe (Procured in the field)
1Referring to Table 1 and Table 2, prepare the straight pipe and the elbow in the field, which are
used in the construction examples A-D applicable to the connecting direction.
2Firstly, use the accessory pipe to assemble the connecting pipe assembly outside the outdoor unit.
As shown in the figures of construction examples A~D applicable to the connecting direction
(chain double dashed line), braze the accessory pipe and the parts prepared in the above 1.
Orient the accessory pipe according to the dimensions as shown in of Fig. 1.
3After assembly of the connecting pipe, connect it to the operation valve on the gas side inside the
outdoor unit.
Tighten the flare nut with appropriate torque.
4After connection of the connecting pipe assembly to the operation valve on the gas side, braze the
connecting pipe assembly and the field pipe.
5After the brazing, insulate using the attached heat insulating material and band as shown by Fig. 2.
If no nitrogen gas is supplled, a large amount of impurity (oxidized film) will be generated,
which may clog the capillary tube and the expansion valve, resulting in fatal malfunction.
Be sure to use pipes of 1/2H material, and wall thickness above 1mm. (Pressure resistance of O-type
pipe is not enough)
Select and use the pipes, which are procured in the field,
according to the specification that corresponds to the
outdoor unit capacity as described in the installation manual.
Be sure to braze while supplying nitrogen gas.
About brazing
Name
Accessory pipe
Heat insulating material
Band
Straight pipe 1
Straight pipe 2
Elbow
ADownward BForward CRightward DBackward
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Quantity
1
1
2
1
1 or 0
1 or 0
Remark
Accessory
Accessory
Accessory
Procured at the field
Procured at the field (Not required for downward direction)
Procured at the field (Not required for downward direction)
Straight pipe1
Straight pipe2
Straight pipe 1
Straight pipe 2
270 mm or over
70~120mm
125mm or over
70~120mm
125mm or over
70~120mm
515mm or over
224
280
335
19.05T1.0
22.22T1.0
25.4 T1.0
PSB012D917G K
19.05 100~120Nm
Accessory pipe
Accessory pipe
Accessory pipe
Accessory pipe
Internal face of base
Operation valve connecting
position at gas side
Band
Proper torque
(Accessory)
(Accessory)
Pipe specification
Heat insulating material
In
t
e
r
n
a
l
f
a
c
e

o
f

b
a
s
e
(Procured in the field,
125 mm or more)
Straight pipe 2
125 mm or more)
Straight pipe 2
515 mm or more)
Elbow,
procured in the field
Elbow,
Elbow,
Braze the refrigerant pipe here.
Braze the refrigerant pipe here.
Braze the refrigerant
pipe here.
Braze the refrigerant
pipe here.
Connection example of refrigerant pipe - B
(Forward connection)
Connection example of refrigerant pipe - D
(Backward connection)
Connection example of refrigerant pipe - C
(Rightward connection)
Connection example of refrigerant pipe - A
(Downward connection)
Heat insulating method
(Fig. 2)
Accessory pipe x 1 pc
Heat insulating
material x 1 pc
Band x 2 pcs
Heat insulating material is attached to the accessory pipe with
band. When installing the heat insulating material, cut the band
and retrieve it.
Two pieces of fig. 2 band for installation are found in a bag.
40
6
7
70 - 120 mm)
Straight pipe 1
70 - 120 mm)
Straight pipe 1
70 - 120 mm)
Straight pipe 1
270 mm or more)
Accessory pipe position
(Fig. 1)
-
265
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(1) Check operation
The following can be checked automatically with this operation.
Checking of operation valves opened/closed.
Checks to see if operation valves are opened.
Checking of mismatch on wiring or piping.
Checks to see if refrigerant piping or signal wiring between indoor and outdoor units in the same refrigerant system are
connected properly.
Checking of indoor expansion valve operation.
Checks to see if indoor expansion valve operates properly.
* Check operation should be performed before initial test run after completion of installation.
When any corrective measure for nonconformity has been taken, perform the check operation again after repair.
Operational condition
Temperature range: Outdoor air temperature 0 43, Indoor air temperature 10 32.
Connecting capacity of indoor units: 80% or more of outdoor unit capacity.
Precautions
Check each outdoor unit system for single use or each refrigeration system for combination use.
Outdoor units in other refrigerant system shall not be operated.
After turning on power supply to outdoor unit and connected indoor units, start check operation with all connected indoor
units stopped.
In combination use, check the setting and the result displayed on the 7-segment display of master outdoor unit.
If the unit has been operating before check operation, wait for 5 minutes after stopping the unit operation before starting
check operation, in order to avoid misjudgment.
In combination use, judging operation valves opened or closed by check operation can be done as no good (NG), when
all of operation valves in liquid line, gas line and oil equalizing line of both master and slave outdoor units are closed.
However, in other cases than the above, judgment may not be done.
During check operation it is impossible to stop operation from remote controller. Accordingly, before starting check operation,
be sure to confirm that no one working near the indoor unit especially near the rotating part such as fan of indoor unit or
something is remaining near the fan of indoor unit.
Purpose
The purpose of this check operation is only to verify any overlooked items to be checked during the ordinary checking done
at the site after installation. Accordingly it has no function to substitute the ordinary checking to be done during or after installation
work and to restore automatically as a result of checking operation.
Therefore be sure to conduct the checking in ordinary way after installation firstly, and then to perform this check operation.
We believe that this checking method could prevent from overlooking any items to be checked.
7.6 Check operation procedure
-
266
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(2) Flow of the check operation
Check operation is performed as follows.
Note (1) For preliminary check method, refer to (3) Confirmation before check operation.
(2) For details of check operation, refer to (4) Check operation procedure.
(3) For measures to be taken in case of NG, refer to (5) Measures to be taken after check operation.
Preliminary check Note (1)
Judgment of checked result Note (3)

End
NG
OK
Auto checking Note (2)

Start
-
267
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(3) Confirmation before check operation
Confirm the installation has been completed properly by hearing, actual inspection or other method.
This preliminary confirmation is indispensable to prevent troubles during or after check operation.
Check operation can be performed only when the following conditions (1) (8) are established.
Check the following contents listed in the table with 7-segment display and MentePC.
Item Content Check method Check result
(1) Preparation Supply power to outdoor and
indoor units.
No outdoor unit in other
refrigerant systems is operating.
All indoor units are stopped.
It has elapsed more than 5
minutes after the stopping.
(2) Connecting capacity of
indoor units
Connecting capacity of indoor
units is 80% or more of outdoor
unit capacity.
Check capacities of outdoor and indoor units.
(3) Address setting Addresses of outdoor unit
(in combination use, both of master
and slave outdoor units) and
indoor units have been set.
Check the number of connected units.
(4) Temperature range Outdoor air temperature is 0
43. Indoor air temperature is
10 32.
Check outdoor air temperature with 7-segment
display and indoor air temperature with
MentePC.
(5) Others System communicating method
is of new SL.
Check the model name of outdoor unit, indoor
units, central control device, etc.
System is not in error stop
condition.
Check to see if any error code (E??) is
displayed on indoor or outdoor unit.
(6) Outdoor unit operation
valve
Outdoor unit operation valve is
opened. *1
Check visually.
(7) Refrigerant amount Proper amount of refrigerant is
charged.
Check the additional charged amount of
refrigerant is written in the plate for specifying
refrigerant charging amount on the back of
outdoor service panel.
(8) Number of connected
indoor units
It is same as the number of
connected indoor units installed.
Check with 7-segement display or MentePC.
*1 Be sure to open the operation valves in both liquid and gas lines of outdoor unit before starting check operation. In combination use,
open the operation valves not only in liquid and gas lines but also in oil equalizing line of both master and slave outdoor units.
Operating with operation valves closed causes vacuum operation that results in a compressor fault.
If the operation valves are closed before test run, be sure to verify whether the evacuation, air tightness test and additional refrigerant
charge have been completed by hearing to installation contractor, before opening the operation valves.
Otherwise, it may cause such trouble as mixing air (non-condensation gas and water) in, forgetting to charge additional refrigerant
at the site, or others.
-
268
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(4) Check operation procedure
Flow Work
Operation status
(Displayed on 7-segment)
Meaning of
7-segment display
Remarks
Preliminary
check
Check in advance as per (3)
Confirmation before check
operation.
Dont operate any outdoors unit in
other refrigerant systems during
check operation.
Start of check
operation
Turn Chek operation switch
(SW3-5) on outdoor control
PCB from OFF to ON.
In combination use, turn
Chek operation switch
(SW3-5) on master control
PCB from OFF to ON.
H1 Max. remaining time Remai ni ng ti me: Max.
remaining time for check
operation
This operation status is displayed
during preparation for check
operation.
Depending on conditions, it may not
be displayed.
In combination use, H0--- is
displayed on the slave outdoor unit.
*Be sure to start check operation
when all indoor units are stopping.
H0 HE When H0-HE is
displayed for more then 10
minutes, then check
operation is not started yet.
In such case refer to (3)
conrmation before check
Implementing
auto checking
H2 Max. remaining time Remaining time: Max.
remaining time for auto
checking.
In combination use, H0--- is
displayed on the slave outdoor unit.
End of auto
checking,
judgment
result
Record the indication of
7-segment i ndi cator on
outdoor unit.
CHO End Result of check operation
is judged normal.
End the check operation.
CHL--- Operation valve may be
closed.
Refer to (5) Measures to be
taken after check operation.
CHU Anomalous indoor
unit No.
Ref ri gerant pi pi ng or
signal wiring between
indoor and outdoor units
may not be connected
correctly.
CHJ Anomalous indoor
unit No.
Indoor expansion valve
may not be operati ng
properly.
CHE--- Check operation has not
ended properly.
All judgment results at
the end are displayed.
Other display
Check of
nonconforming
item
Check for anomalous condition
as per (5) Measures to be
taken after check operation
When any display other than
CHO-End is displayed
after auto checking.
Refer to (5) Measures to be
taken after check operation.
End of check
operation
Turn off Chek operation
run switch (SW3-5) on
outdoor control PCB.
Returns to normal display.
Notes (1) When HO-HE is displayed for more than 10 minutes, or any displays other than CHO-End is displayed at the end of cheek
operation, turn SW3-5 to OFF and take necessary measures.
And then turn SW3-5 to ON again and perform the check operation.
(2) During check operation it is impossible to stop operation from remote controller. Accordingly, before starting check operation, be
sure to confirm that no one working near the indoor unit especially near the rotating part such as fan of indoor unit or something is
remaining near the fan of indoor unit.
When interrupting check operation, turu SW3-5 to OFF, Compressor stops and 7-segment display returns to normal display.
-
269
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(5) Measures to be taken after check operation
When any display other than CHO-End is displayed after completing the judgment of check operation, the meanings of each display
are shown as follows.
After checking the contents of inspection and repairing nonconforming items, perform check operation again.
Code
display
Data
display
Meaning of display Contents of Inspection
CHL --- Refrigerant circuit is choked at certain
place.
Operation valve on outdoor unit may be left closed.
Low pressure sensor may be anomalous.
Check the detected pressure displayed on 7-segment and compare it with the
value measured with gauge manifold.
Refrigerant piping or signal wiring may not be connected properly. *1 (See page
271.) Check with Mente PC, etc.
Indoor heat exchanger temperature thermistor may be anomalous or disconnected.
*2 (See page 271.)
Refrigerant may not be charged correctly.
Indoor unit expansion valve may not be operating properly.
Connector of indoor unit expansion valve coil may not be connected. *3 (See page
271.)
Indoor unit expansion valve coil may be disconnected from main body of expansion
valve. *4 (See page 271.)
Outdoor unit PCB may be defective.
CHU Anomalous
indoor unit
No.
Refrigerant is not circulated in the
indoor unit of indicated No.
Refrigerant piping or signal cables may not be connected properly between indoor
and outdoor units. *1 (See page 271.) Check with Mente PC, etc.
*2 (See page 271.)
Operation valve on outdoor unit may be left closed.
Check it especially when many indoor units No. are displayed in data display column of CHU.
it may be displayed by inuence of liquid ooding due to the trouble on any other
indoor unit. If CHJ is displayed at the same time, check preferentially the indoor
unit displaying CHJ and after repairing, perform check operation again.
271.)
CHJ Anomalous
indoor unit
No.
Expansion valve on the indoor unit
of indicated No. does not operate
properly.
*2 (See page 271.)
it may be displayed by inuence of liquid ooding due to the trouble on any other
indoor unit.
Contamination may be trapped in expansion valve due to installation or transitional cause.
271.)
CH1 --- Indoor heat exchanger temperature
anomaly.
*2 (See page 271.)
CH3 --- Unable to do indoor EEV trouble check. Unable to do indoor EEV trouble check because of unstable operation.
-
270
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Code
display
Data
display
Meaning of display Contents of Inspection
CHH --- It may be liquid ooding. Refrigerant piping or signal cables may not be connected properly between indoor
and outdoor units. *1 (See next page.)
Power switch may be turned off on some indoor units.
Check if power is supplied to all indoor units.
Connector of indoor unit expansion valve coil may not be connected. *3 (See next
page)
valve. *4 (See next page.)
If no indoor unit indicates CHJ, check also indoor units which are not showing CHJ.
CHE --- Anomalous stop of check operation. Some error may happen on indoor or outdoor units.
Check if any error code E?? is displayed on indoor or outdoor units.
There may be anomalous on signal wire connection.
Check if signal wire is connected rmly.
SW setting on outdoor PCB might have been changed.
Check if any SW setting has been changed during check operation.
CHE Anomalous
indoor unit
No.
Anomalous stop of check operation.
Indoor unit indicated its No. has
anomaly.
Some error may happen on indoor or outdoor units.
Check if any error code E?? is displayed on indoor or outdoor units.
There may be anomalous on signal wire connection.
Check if signal wire is connected rmly.
Power switch may be turned off on some indoor units.
Check if power is supplied to indoor units.
E 40 High pressure anomaly. Refrigerant circuit may be choked at a certain place. Refer to the technical manual
or the above.
E 42 Current cut. Refrigerant circuit may be choked at a certain place. Refer to the technical manual
or the above.
It might have been started operation while bottom of compressor was still cold.
Perform check operation again after the bottom of compressor has been enough
warm.
E 49 Low pressure anomaly. Refrigerant circuit may be choked at a certain place. Refer to the technical manual
or the above.
E 36-3 Liquid ooding anomaly. It may be in the same condition as CHH---. Refer to the technical manual or the
above.
Note (1) When an error code (E??) is displayed, press SW9 to display all indicalions other than the error code in series.
Press SW9 again to return to error display.
(2) When check operation has been suspended, the followings listed in below table are displayed depending on judgment at
the time of stoppage.
Code display Data display Contents of display
HL --- Refrigerant circuit is choked at a certain place.
HL LPL Refrigerant circuit is choked at a certain place. (In combination use)
HU Anomalous indoor unit No. Refrigerant is not circulated in the indoor unit of indicated No.
HJ Anomalous indoor unit No. Expansion valve does not operate on the indoor unit of indicated No.
UU Anomalous indoor unit No. Refrigerant is not circulated in the indoor unit of indicated No.
U Anomalous indoor unit No. Refrigerant was not circulated in the indoor unit of indicated No. just after starting but it
has been conrmed that it is now circulated.
(3) If refrigerant circuit is choked at a certain place, it may be stopped with error code E40 (High pressure anomaly), E42
(Current cut) or E49 (Low pressure anomaly).
(4) When it has stopped with error code E36-3 (Liquid flooding anomaly), it may be in the same condition as CHH---.
(5) When it has stopped with error code E42 (Current cut), it might have been started operation while bottom of compressor
was still cold. Perform check operation again after the bottom of compressor has been enough warm.
-
271
-
'10 KX-DB-147
*1 Piping
Wiring
Normal Wrong wiring
Outdoor unit
1
Outdoor unit
2
Outdoor unit
1
Outdoor unit
2
Indoor unit
1
Indoor unit
2
Indoor unit
3
Indoor unit
4
Indoor unit
1
Indoor unit
2
Indoor unit
3
Indoor unit
4
*2 (If the connector comes off by a weak pull, its no good. If not come off, Its OK)
The connector of indoor heat exchanger temperature thermistor.
Normal Disconnected

*3 (If the connector comes off by a weak pull, its no good. If not come off, Its OK)
The connector of indoor expansion valve coil.
Normal Disconnected
*4
The indoor expansion valve coil itself.
Normal Disconnected from main body

-

2
7
2

-

'
1
0

K
X
-
D
B
-
1
4
7
(6) Data sheet
<Check Operation Data Sheet>
Project name Location
Fill necessary data in advance
Model Address
Outdoor
unit
Master FDC
Slave FDC
Fill necessary data in advance
No. Model Address
Piping length
O/U-I/U
Elevation difference
O/U-I/U
No. Model Address
Piping length
O/U-I/U
Elevation difference
O/U-I/U
Indoor unit 1 FD 41 FD
2 FD 42 FD
3 FD 43 FD
4 FD 44 FD
5 FD 45 FD
6 FD 46 FD
7 FD 47 FD
8 FD 48 FD
9 FD 49 FD
10 FD 50 FD
11 FD 51 FD
12 FD 52 FD
13 FD 53 FD
14 FD 54 FD
15 FD 55 FD
16 FD 56 FD
17 FD 57 FD
18 FD 58 FD
19 FD 59 FD
20 FD 60 FD
21 FD 61 FD
22 FD 62 FD
23 FD 63 FD
24 FD 64 FD
25 FD 65 FD
26 FD 66 FD
27 FD 67 FD
28 FD 68 FD
29 FD 69 FD
30 FD 70 FD
31 FD 71 FD
32 FD 72 FD
33 FD 73 FD
34 FD 74 FD
35 FD 75 FD
36 FD 76 FD
37 FD 77 FD
38 FD 78 FD
39 FD 79 FD
40 FD 80 FD
Date of installation (d/m/y)
Name of installer
Superlink version
Superlink II
Superlink I*
* In case of Superlink I, the check operation cannot be implemented.
Judgment
Checked items Result
No anomaly allowed.
If anomaly occurred: Error code E-
7-segment display at completion
Others
(Comment/Measures to be taken/etc.)
Checked by
Date of checking (d/m/y)
Weather
Outdoor air temperature
Start time of check operation (h/m/)
Completion time of check operation (h/m/)
-
273
-
'10 KX-DB-147
7.7 Instructions for installing the branch pipe set (option)
2
ID
2
5
.
4
O
D
2
8
.
5
8
100
P9
ID
3
4
.
9
2
O
D
3
8
.
1
100
P15
DIS-540-2
100
ID
3
4
.9
2
O
D
3
8
.1
P15
PSB012D855B
-
274
-
'10 KX-DB-147
2
(model type DIS)
(model type HEAD)
-
275
-
'10 KX-DB-147
2
2
-
276
-
'10 KX-DB-147
2
2
2
2
2
-
277
-
'10 KX-DB-147
WARNING
f Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply unexpected
stress on the terminal.
f Make sure the power supply is turned off when electric wiring work.
CAUTION
f DO NOT install the wireless kit at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to gen-
erate condensation
(5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
(6) Uneven surface
(7) Places affected by the direct airow of the
AC unit.
(8) Places where the receiver is inuenced by
the fluorescent lamp (especially inverter
type) or sunlight.
(9) Places where the receiver is affected by
infrared rays of any other communication
devices
(10) Places where some object may obstruct the
communication with the remote controller
f DO NOT leave the wireless kit without the cover.
In case the cover needs to be detached, protect the receiver with a packaging box or bag in order
to keep it away from water and dust.
Note
f Instruct the customer how to operate it correctly referring to the instruction manual.
f For the installation method of the air conditioner itself, refer to the installation manual enclosed in the package.
OPTION PARTS
8.1 Wireless kit
-
278
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(a) FDT Series (RCN-T-36W-E)
The FDT series is an exclusive series with all wired models. However, these models can also be used wireless units by using the op-
tional wireless kit.
(1) Wireless kit model
(2) Accessories
Please make sure that you have all of the following accessories.
(3) How to install the receiver
The receiver can be installed by replacing with a corner panel on the applicable decorative panel.
Attach the decorative panel onto the air conditioner according to the installation manual for the panel.
Remove the air return grille.
Remove a corner panel located on the refrigerant pipes side.
Remove three screws and detach the cover (indicated as shadowed area) from the control box of the air conditioner.
Setting on site
PCB on the receiver has the following switches to set the functions. Default setting is shown with mark.
Receiver
Parts set
Wireless
remote
controller
Remote controller holder
AAA dry cell battery
(RO3)
Wood screw for holder
Model
RCN-T-36W-E
Normal
Remote
Master
Slave
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Customized signal setting to avoid
mixed communication
Receiver master/slave setting
Buzzer valid/Invalid
Auto restart
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
PJF012D010
-
279
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Remove the cover by unscrewing two screws from the back of receiver.
Change the setting by the switch on PCB.
When SW1 is turned to OFF position, change the corresponding remote controller setting as follows:
How to change the remote controller setting
Pressing ACL and AIR FLOW button at the same time or inserting the
batteries with pressing AIR FLOW button will customize the signal.
Note
* When the batteries are removed, the setting will return to the default setting.
Please make sure to reset it when the batteries are replaced.
Caution
Instruct the customer to set the mentioned above when replacing the batteries.
(How to set is also mentioned in the users manual attached on the air conditioner.)
Screws
Default settings
Switch
Receiver Backside Cover Backside
Radio interference prevention mode
-
280
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Installation of the receiver
Loosen the bolts which x the panel and make a gap between the panel and the indoor unit
Put the wiring of the receiver through the opening.
Put the wiring on the notch on the control box so as not to be pinched by the control box and lid as shown below.
Connect the wiring to the terminal block provided in the control box. (Non- polarized)
Attach the receiver to the panel according to the panel installation manual.
Fix the wiring with the clamp so that the wiring do not contact the edge of control boxs metal sheet.
Reattach the control box lid with 3 screws removed.
*Note: Make sure the wires not to be pinched by any other parts like panel, control box and indoor unit.
Terminal block in the indoor
unit control box
-
281
-
'10 KX-DB-147

Ensure the correct
polarity when
inserting.
Wood screw
Holder for remote controller
(4) Remote controller
Installation of the controller holder
Caution
DO NOT install it on the following places
1. Places exposed to direct sunlight
2. Places near heat devices
3. High humidity places
4. Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation
5. Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly.
6. Uneven surface
Installation tips for the remote controller holder
Adjust and keep the holder upright
Tighten the screw to the end to avoid scratching the remote controller.
DO NOT attach the holder on plaster wall.
How to insert batteries
Detach the back lid.
Insert the batteries. (two AAA batteries)
Reattach the back lid.
-
282
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Control plural indoor units with one remote controller
Up to 16 indoor units can be connected.
Connect the XY terminal with 2-core wire. As for the size, refer to the following note.
For Packaged air conditioner series, set the indoor unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from [0] to [F] so as not
to duplicate.
Restrictions on the thickness and length of wire
(Maximun total extension 600m.)
Standard Within 100m x 0.3 mm
2
Within 200m x 0.5 mm
2
Within 300m x 0.75mm
2
2
2
Terminal block
Remote controller
Indoor unit (1)
Address (0)
Indoor unit (2)
Address (1)
Indoor unit (16)
Address ( F )
Receiver
For VRF series, set the indoor unit address with SW1, SW2 and SW5-2 on the indoor unit PCB from [000] to [127] so as
not to duplicate.
Master/Slave setting when using plural remote controllers
Up to two receivers can be installed in one indoor unit group.
When two receivers are used, it is necessary for a receiver to turn OFF SW2 on the receiver PCB to set it as slave.
(For the method of switching, please see Setting on site in the section of How to install the receiver in this manual.)
Wireless remote controller's operable area
Standard reachable area of the signal
[condition] Illuminance at the receiver: 300lux
(when no lighting is installed within 1m of the receiver in an ordinary ofce.)
Ceiling surface
0 1m 2m 3m 4m
30
Reachable area of the signal
1
.
4
m
2
.
5
m
1
.
1
m
-
283
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Correlation between illuminance at the receiver and
reachable area of the signal in a plain view. The
drawing in the right shows the correlation between
the reachable area of the signal and illuminance at
the receiver when the remote controller is operated
at 1.1m high under the condition of ceiling height
of 2.5m. When the illuminance becomes double,
the area is narrowed down to two thirds.
Installation tips when several receivers are installed close Minimum distance between the indoor units which can avoid
cross communication is 5m under the condition of 300lux of illuminance at the receiver.
(When no lighting is installed within 1m of the receiver in an ordinary ofce )
The receivable area of the
signal when the illuminance
at the receiver is 300lux
(5) How to disable the Auto mode operation
VRF system (except heat recovery 3-pipe systems) cannot be operated in Auto mode.
Make sure to set the remote controller for the models so as not to be able to choose Auto
mode.
Pushing ACL and MODE button at the same time or inserting the batteries with
pressing MODE button will make auto mode operation.
Attention
* When the batteries are removed, the setting will return to the default setting
(Auto mode is valid).
Caution
Auto mode operation setting
-
284
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(6) Backup button
A Backup button is provided on the receiver.
Even when the operation from the wireless remote controller is not possible
(due to at batteries, controller lost, or controller failure), still it possible to
operate as temporary means. Press the button directly when operating it.
(a) The air conditioner starts the operation with the condition of Auto
mode, 23C of set point, High fan speed and horizontal louver position.
(b) The air conditioner stops the operation when the button is pressed when
in operation.
(7) Cooling test run operation
f After safety conrmation, turn on the power.
f Transmit a cooling operation command with wireless remote controller, while the backup button on the receiver is pressed.
f If the backup button on the receiver is pressed during a test run, it will end the test run.
f If you cannot operate the unit properly during a test run, please check by consulting with inspection guides on the wiring
diagram of outdoor units.
(8) How to read the two-digit display
On the receiver of a wireless kit, a two-digit (7-segment) display is provided.
(a) An indication will be displayed for one hour after power on.
(b) An indication will be displayed for 3.5 seconds after transmitting a STOP command from the wireless remote controller
or the operation of the backup button to stop the unit.
(c) An indication appearing in (a) or (b) above will go off as soon as the unit starts operation.
(d) When there are no error records to indicate, addresses of all the connected units are displayed.
(e) When there are some error records remaining, the error records are displayed.
(f) Error records can be cleared by transmitting a STOP command from the wireless remote controller, while the backup
button is pressed.
backup button
-
285
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(b) FDTC Series (RCN-TC-24W-ER)
The FDTC series is an exclusive series with all wired models. However, these models can also be used wireless units by using the
optional wireless kit.
(2) Accessories
The receiver can be installed by replacing with a corner panel on the applicable decorative panel.
Attach the decorative panel onto the air conditioner according to the installation manual for the panel.
Remove the air return grille.
Remove a corner panel located on the refrigerant pipes side.
Remove to screws and detach the lid from the control box of the air conditioner.
Receiver
Parts set
Wireless
remote
controller
Remote controller holder
(RO3)
Wood screw for holder
Model
RCN-TC-24W-ER
Drain plug
PJA012D758
-
286
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Screws
Receiver Backside Cover Backside
Default settings
Switch
Setting on site
PCB on the receiver has the following switches to set the functions. Default setting is shown with mark.
Normal
Remote
Master
Slave
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
mixed communication
Buzzer valid/Invalid
Auto restart
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
Remove the cover by unscrewing two screws from the back of receiver.
Change the setting by the switch on PCB.
When SW1 is turned to OFF position, change the corresponding remote controller
setting as follows:
How to change the remote controller setting
Pressing ACL switch with AIR FLOW button kept pressing or inserting the
batteries with pressing AIR FLOW button will customize the signal.
Note
* When the batteries are removed, the setting will return to the default set-
ting.
Please make sure to reset it when the batteries are replaced.
Caution
Instruct the customer to set the mentioned above when replacing the
batteries.(How to set is also mentioned in the users manual attached on the
air conditioner.) Radio interference prevention mode
-
287
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Installation of the receiver
Attach the receiver to the panel according to the panel installation manual.
Remove two screws and detach the lid from the control box.
Put the wiring in the control box with other wiring as shown below.
Connect the wiring to the terminal block (X, Y) provided in the control box. (Non- polarized)
Fix the wiring with the clamp as shown below.
Reattach the control box lid with 2 screws removed.
* Note: Make sure wires not to be pinched by any other parts like panel and control box.
, Clamp
Control box
Wiring Terminal block (X, Y)
Terminal block (X, Y) in the indoor
unit control box
-
288
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Ensure the correct
polarity when
inserting.
Wood screw
Caution
5. Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly.
6. Uneven surface
Adjust and keep the holder upright
DO NOT attach the holder on plaster wall.
Detach the back lid
-
289
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Connect the XY terminal with 2-core wire. As for the size, refer to the following note.
For signal packaged air conditioner series, set the indoor unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from [0] to [F] so
as not to duplicate.
2
2
2
2
2
Terminal block
Remote controller
Indoor unit (1)
Address (0)
Indoor unit (2)
Address (1)
Indoor unit (16)
Address ( F )
Receiver
not to duplicate.
When two receivers are used, it is necessary for a receiver to turn OFF SW2 on the receiver PCB to set it as slave.
(For the method of switching, please see Setting on site in the section of How to install the receiver in this manual.)
Wireless remote controller's operable area
[condition] Illuminance at the receiver: 300lux
(when no lighting is installed within 1m of the receiver in an ordinary ofce.)
Ceiling surface
1
.
4
m
2
.
4
m
1
m
0 1m 2m 3m 4m 1m 2m 3m 4m
Reachable area of the signal
-
290
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Correlation between illuminance at the receiver and
reachable area of the signal in a plain view. The
drawing in the right shows the correlation between
the reachable area of the signal and illuminance at
the receiver when the remote controller is operated at
1m high under the condition of ceiling height of 2.4m.
Installation tips when several receivers are installed close Minimum distance between the indoor units which can avoid
cross communication is 5m under the condition of 300lux of illuminance at the receiver.
(When no lighting is installed within 1m of the receiver in an ordinary ofce )
(5) How to disable the Auto mode operation
VRF system (except heat recovery 3-pipe systems) cannot be operated in Auto mode.
Make sure to set the remote controller for the models so as not to be able to choose Auto
mode.
Pushing ACL switch with MODE button kept pressing or inserting the batteries
with pressing MODE button will make auto mode operation.
Note
* When the batteries are removed, the setting will return to the default setting
(Auto mode is valid).
Caution
(6) Backup button
A Backup button is provided on the receiver. Even when the operation
from the wireless remote controller is not possible (due to at batter-
ies, controller Iost, or controller failure), still it possible to operate as
temporary means. Press the button directly when operating it.
(a) The air conditioner starts the operation with the condition of
Auto mode, 23C of set point, High fan speed and horizontal
louver position.
(b) The air conditioner stops the operation when the button is
pressed when in operation.
Backup button
-
291
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(8) How to read the two-digit display
On the receiver of a wireless kit, a two-digit (7-segment) display is provided.
(a) An indication will be displayed for one hour after power on.
(b) An indication will be displayed for 3.5 seconds after transmitting a STOP command from the wireless remote controller
or the operation of the backup button to stop the unit.
(c) An indication appearing in (a) or (b) above will go off as soon as the unit starts operation.
(d) When there are no error records to indicate, addresses of all the connected units are displayed.
(e) When there are some error records remaining, the error records are displayed.
(f) Error records can be cleared by transmitting a STOP command from the wireless remote controller, while the backup
button is pressed.
-
292
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(C) FDK Series
RCN-K-E (Models : FDK22~56)
RCN-K71-E (Model : FDK71)
296
PHA012D038
-
293
-
'10 KX-DB-147
295
-
294
-
'10 KX-DB-147
see next page
-
295
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
296
-
'10 KX-DB-147
297
-
297
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Wiring 6
Wireless remote controller operation distance 7
Connect indoor units with each other with 2-core wires. As
for size, refer to the following note.
The receiver wires must be connected only with the indoor
unit that will be operated by the remote controller directly.
Use the rotary SW1 and SW2 provided on the indoor unit
PCB (Printed circuit board) to set unique remote control
Points for attention in connecting a plural number of indoor units
[Condition]
Illuminance at the receiver area: 360 lux.
(Maximum total extension 600m.)
Standard Within 100m x 0.3mm
2
Within 200m x 0.5mm
2
2
2
Within 600m x 2.0mm
2
1
2
3
1
2
60o 60o
(Top view)
5
m
5
m
Receivable range Receivable range
5m
Standard signal receiving range
[Condition]
(When no lighting fixture is located within 1m of indoor unit in an ordinary office)
60o
5
m
Receivable range
(Top view)
Outdoor unit
No.01
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.01
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.02
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.04
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.05
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.06
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.03
Outdoor unit
No.02
Interface PCB
Receiver
8
(No polarity)
1
m
2
.
0
m
Floor surface
Within 5m
Wireless remote
controller unit
-
298
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Trial operation 8
The backup switch is provided on the receiver section. It is possible to use the backup switch as shown in the
figure below. When operation from the wireless remote controller unit is not possible (due to flat batteries, a
mislaid unit, a unit failure), the backup switch can be used as an emergency means. The backup switch is
operated manually.
(1) If pressed while the air conditioner is in a halt, it will cause the air conditioner to start operation in the
automatic mode (in the case of cooling only, in the cooling mode).
Fan speed: Hi fan, Temperature setting: 23oC, Louver: horizontal
(2) If pressed while the air conditioner is in operation, it will stop the air conditioner.
After safety confirmation, turn on the power.
Transmit a cooling operation command with the wireless remote controller, while the backup switch on the
receiver is depressed.
If the backup switch on the receiver is pressed during a test run, it will end the test run.
If the air conditioner can not operate properly during the test run, check wiring according to the trouble shooting
guides.
Backup switch
Cooling test run operation
Backup switch
<FDK71> <FDK22-56>
Backup switch
NOTE
1. After over 2 minute from power on, operate the wireless remote controller.
The operation is invalid during 2 minute from power on.
2. Check indicator lamp check1 / check2 shows error code.
The number of blinking shows the error code number of tens/ones place and check1/check2 corresponds to
tens/ones place.
-
299
-
'10 KX-DB-147
300)
(d) FDE Series (RCN-E-E)
PFA012D619A
-
300
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
301
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
302
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
303
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(e) FDFW Series (RCN-FW-E)
WIRELESS KIT INSTALLATION MANUAL
Accessories
Remote controller
holder
(RO3)
Wood screw
for holder
Wireless remote
controller
1 1 1 2 2
Screw for display
2 1
1
Display label Control ASSY
The interface PCB has the following
switches to set the function.
Default setting is shown with mark.
1. Remove the upper case of the interface PCB assy.
2. Change the switch setting on PCB.
Setting on site To change setting
NOTE
When SW1-1 is turned to off position, change the wireless remote
controller setting.
For the method of changing the setting, refer to Setting to avoid
mixed communication on page 372.
Preparation before installation 2
ON : Normal (1ch)
OFF : Customized (2ch)
Prevents interference
during plural setting
Receiver master/slave
setting
Buzzer valid/invalid
Auto restart
SW1-1
SW1-2
SW1-3
SW1-4
ON : Master
OFF : Slave
ON : Valid
OFF : Invalid
OFF : Invalid
Indication for error
Not in use
SW1-5
SW1-6
ON : Valid
OFF : Invalid
ON :
OFF :
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
Receiver
Terminal
Interface PCB
upper case
Switch
Default settings
SW1
ON : Valid
WARNING
CAUTION
Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work.
If the power is supplied during servicing or inspection work, it could cause electric shock and injury by the operating fan.
Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cable securely in order not to apply
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire.
Shut off the power before electrical wiring work.
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running.
DO NOT leave the wireless kit without the cover.
In case the cover needs to be detached, protect the receiver with a packaging box or bag in order to keep it away from water and dust.
Instruct the customer how to operate it correctly referring to the instruction manual.
For the installation method of the air conditioner itself, refer to the installation manual enclosed in the package.
DO NOT install it in the following places.
Attention
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation
(5) Places directly exposed to oil mist or steam
(6) Places where the receiver is influenced by the fluorescent lamp
(especially inverter type) or sunlight.
(7) Places where the receiver is affected by infrared rays of any
other communication devices
(8) Places where some object may obstruct the communication with
the remote controller
305
PGF012D002
-
304
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Ensure the correct
polarity when
inserting.
How to install the control assy 3
The control assy (Receiver and Interface PCB assy) can be installed inside the indoor unit.
After turning off the power and confirming safety, execute as follows.
Remove Inlet panel
a) Pull the inlet panel towards you at the upper side of both
sides, and detach the latches.
b) Remove the retainer string from the front panel.
c) Remove the inlet panel.
1
Remove Front panel
a) Remove the fixing screw. (5 pieces)
b) Detach the latches at the upper side of the front panel. (3 places)
If difficult to remove the latch, detach the latch portion by using
straight screw driver, for example.
c) Move the lower part of the front panel towards you.
d) Detach the latches at the lower side of the front panel. (6 places)
2
Put back Front panel
a) Place the front panel over the indoor unit.
b) Hang the latches on the lower side of the front panel. (6 places)
c) Hang the latches on the upper side of the front panel. (3 places)
d) Tighten the fixing screw. (5 pieces)
5
Put back Inlet panel
a) Put the lower side of the inlet panel on the front panel.
b) Hang the retainer string on the claw of the front panel.
c) Snap the latch of the inlet panel upper side into the front panel.
6
3
Install Control assy
a) Fix the receiver on the indoor unit, by the attached screw.
(2 pieces, refer to figure 1)
Make sure that the claw of the receiver hungs on the claw
of the indoor unit control box. (Refer to figure 2)
b) Put the interface PCB assy on the indoor unit control box.
Put the interface PCB assy securely in the innermost
location, when installing the front panel. (Refer to figure 3)
c) Fix the wiring on indoor unit control box by the clips.
(3 places, refer to figure 4)
d) Fix the terminal of the wiring assy (for X, Y) on the lower
side terminal block of the indoor unit. (Non-polarity)
4
CAUTION
When removing the inlet
panel, be careful not to
drop it on your feet.
CAUTION DO NOT install it in the following places.
Insert the batteries.
(two AAA batteries)
Wood screw
4. Places directly exposed to oil mist or steam
6. Uneven surface
Installation tips for the remote controller holder How to insert batteries
Adjust and keep the holder
up right.
Tighten the screw to the end
to avoid scratching the
remote controller.
DO NOT attach the holder
on plaster wall.
How to install the wireless remote controller 4
1
2
3
Latch
Latch
Pull
Clip
Screw
Claw
Remove Display label and stick on Display label
a) Peel off the original display label, on the upper side. ( Mark)
Press the back side of label, then the label floats.
b) Stick the attached display label on the same location.
CAUTION MUST change the display label.
If the display label is not changed, the receiver can not receive the signal from the remote controller.
Terminal block
(X, Y)
Screw
fig. 3
fig. 1
fig. 4
fig. 2
-
305
-
'10 KX-DB-147
In case of plural setting, check the operation distance of wireless remote controller, and avoid mixed
communication.
Refer to 7 Wireless remote controller operation distance on page 373 about the operation distance.
It is necessary to change setting of interface PCB and wireless remote controller.
(1) Interface PCB
Set SW1-1 to OFF position.
(2) Wireless remote controller
Pressing ACL and AIR FLOW button at the same time or inserting the batteries with
pressing AIR FLOW button will customize the signal.
VRF system (except heat recovery 3-pipe system) cannot be operated in Auto mode.
Make sure to set the remote controller for the models so as not to be able to choose
Auto mode.
Pressing ACL and MODE button at the same time or inserting the batteries with
pressing MODE button will make auto mode operation.
ATTENTION
When the batteries are removed, the setting will return to the default setting. Please
make sure to reset it when the batteries are replaced.
CAUTION
Radio prevention mode
Setting to avoid mixed communication
Setting to disable the Auto mode operation
Up to two wireless kit or wired remote controller can be installed in one indoor unit group.
When two wireless kit or wired remote controller are used, it is necessary to change setting on the PCB to slave.
Switch Setting
Master
Slave
Contents
Master remote controller
Slave remote controller
Wired remote controller: SW1
Wireless kit: SW1-2
Function setting of interface PCB and wireless remote controller 5
Wiring 6
Connect indoor units with each other with 2-core wires. As
for size, refer to the following note.
The receiver wires must be connected only with the indoor
unit that will be operated by the remote controller directly.
Use the rotary SW1 and SW2 provided on the indoor unit
PCB (Printed circuit board) to set unique remote control
(Maximum total extension 600m.)
Standard Within 100m x 0.3mm
2
Within 200m x 0.5mm
2
2
2
Within 600m x 2.0mm
2
1
2
3
Outdoor unit
No.01
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.01
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.02
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.04
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.05
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.02
Indoor No.06
Indoor unit
Outdoor No.01
Indoor No.03
Outdoor unit
No.02
Interface PCB
Receiver
8
(No polarity)
306
-
306
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Wireless remote controller operation distance 7
Standard signal receiving range
[Condition]
Illuminance at the receiver area: 360 lux. (When no lighting
fixture is located within 1m of indoor unit in an ordinary office)
Points for attention in connecting a plural
number of indoor units
[Condition]
60o
5
m
Receivable range
(Top view)
1 2
60o 60o
(Top view)
5
m
5
m
Receivable range Receivable range
5m
1
m
Within 5m
Wireless remote
controller unit
Trial operation 8
The backup switch is provided on the display label. It is possible to use the
backup switch as shown in the figure right. When operation from the wireless
remote controller is not possible (due to flat batteries, a mislaid unit, a unit
failure), the backup switch can be used as an emergency means. The backup
switch is operated manually.
(1) If pressed while the air conditioner is in a halt, it will cause the air
conditioner to start operation in the automatic mode (in the case of cooling
only, in the cooling mode).
Fan speed: Hi fan, Temperature setting: 23oC, Louver: horizontal
(2) If pressed while the air conditioner is in operation, it will stop the air
conditioner.
AIR SELECTION button can switch the air supply.
(1) Stop the air conditioner.
(2) Select the airflow from AIR SELECTION button on the unit display.
In case of selecting to upper airflow.
Press the AIRFLOW SELECTION button once.
UPPER AIRFLOW LED will light for ten seconds.
In case of selecting to upper and lower airflow.
When UPPER AIRFLOW LED is lit by pressing AIRFLOW SELECTION
button, press AIRFLOW SELECTION button once again.
UPPER AIRFLOW LED will turn off.
After safety confirmation, turn on the power.
Transmit a cooling operation command with the wireless remote controller, while the backup switch on the
receiver is depressed.
If the backup switch on the receiver is pressed during a test run, it will end the test run.
If the air conditioner can not operate properly during the test run, check wiring according to the trouble shooting
guides.
Backup switch
Cooling test run operation
How to select air flow
NOTE
1. After over 2 minutes from power on, operate the wireless remote controller.
The operation is invalid during 2 minutes from power on.
2. Check indicator lamp check1 / check2 shows error code.
The number of blinking shows the error code number of tens/ones place and check1/check2 corresponds to
tens/ones place.
1
2
AIRFLOW SELECTION button
UPPER AIRFLOW LED
Backup switch
-
307
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(f) Except for FDT, FDTC, FDK, FDE & FDFW Series (RCN-KIT3-E)
This product is dedicated for heat pump unit. Never install on the unit dedicated for cooling.
(2) Accessories (Conrm the following accessories).
(3) Wireless remote controllers operable area
(a) When installed on ceiling
[Condition] Illuminance at the receiver : 300lux (when no lighting is installed within 1m of the receiver in an ordi-
nary ofce.)
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
2
1
5
5
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
Light detection
adaptor
Wiring (3m)
Parts set (A)
Parts set (B)
Parts set (C)
Wireless remote
controller
Users manual
Screw for receiver
Remote controller
holder
Screw for holder
AAA dry cell
battery (R03)
Fixing band
Clamp
Screw for clamp
Receiver
installation bracket
Screw for the bracket
Installation fitting
Model
RCN-KIT3-E
Receiver
Orientation of receiver Ceiling surface
Floor
Floor
Receivable area
of the signal
Orientation of receiver Ceiling surface
Receivable area
of the signal
22
29
1
.
4
m
2
.
4
m
1
m
1
.
4
m
2
.
4
m
1
m
Correlation between illuminance at the receiver and reachable area of the signal in a plain view.
[Condition] Correlation between the reachable area of the signal and illuminance at the receiver when the remote
controller is operated at 1.1m high under the condition of ceiling height of 2.5m.
When the illuminance becomes double, the area is narrowed down to two third.
(b) When installed on wall
[Condition] Illuminance at the receiver : 800lux.
The receivable area of the signal when
the illuminance at the receiver is 300lux.
The receivable area of the signal when
the illuminance at the receiver is 600lux.
Floor
0.6m 1
.
6
m
Receiver
5
m

o
r

l
e
s
s
Wireless
remote controller
5m or less 60 or less
30
or less
30
or less
a PJZ012D060
-
308
-
'10 KX-DB-147
The following two methods can be used to install the receiver onto a ceiling or a wall.
Select a method according to the installation position.
<Installation position>
Direct installation onto the ceiling with wood screws.
Installation with accessory's bracket
(a) Drilling of the ceiling (ceiling opening)
Drill the receiver installation holes with the following dimensions at the ceiling position where wires can be connected.
(A) Direct installation onto the ceiling with
wood screws.
88mm (H) 101mm (W)
108mm (H) 108mm (W) (B) Installation with enclosed bracket.
(b) Wiring connection of receiver
[Caution] Do not connect the wiring to the power source
of the terminal block.
If it is connected, printed board will be damaged.
Indoor unit terminal block
Wiring (non-polarized)
Reciever
(c) Installation of the receiver
Remove the screw on the side of the receiver and sprit it into the upper case and lower case. Install the receiver with one
of the two installation methods (A) or (B) shown below.
( ) Direct installation onto the ceiling with screws
UUse this installation method when the ceiling is wooden, and there is no problem for strength in installing directly with wood
screws.
Wall opening
Lower case
Hole
Wiring
Wiring
Connector Lower case
Installation hole
Opening
Hole
Hole
Upper case
Lower case
Installation hole
8
8
101
-
309
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Put through the wiring from the back side to the hole of the lower case.
Fit the lower case into the ceiling opening. Make sure that the clearance between the convex part of the back of the
lower case and the ceiling opening must be as equal as possible on both sides.
Using the two installation holes shown above, x the lower case onto the ceiling with the enclosed wood screws. (The
other four holes are not used.)
Connect the wiring with the wiring from the upper case by the connector.
Take out the connector to the backside from the hole of the lower case putting through the wiring at .
Fit the upper case and the lower case, and tighten the screws.
( ) Installation with enclosed bracket
UUse this method when installaing onto a gypsum board (7 to 18mm), etc.
Installation fitting
Bracket
Bracket Protrusion (left side of center)
[Top]
[Top]
Hole
(10)
Protrusion
(right side of center)
Lower case
Hole
Wiring
Hole (10)
Hole
Lower case
[Bottom]
[Bottom]
Protrusion (left side of center)
Protrusion
(right side of center)
Bracket
Installation hole
Installation hole
Catch the two protrusion of the enclosed bracket onto the tting as shown above, and temporarily x with the screws.
(The bracket has an up/down and front/back orientation. Conrm the top/bottom protrusion positions and the posi-
tional relation of the 10 holes on the bracket and the installation hole on the lower case with the above drawing.)
Insert the end of the installation tting into the back of the ceiling from the opening, and tighten the screws to x the
bracket onto the ceiling.
Pass the wiring from the rear side through the hole on the lower case.
Fit the lower case onto the bracket, and x the lower case to the bracket using the two installation holes shown above.
(The other four holes are not used.)
Follow step to for (A) to complete the installation.
-
310
-
'10 KX-DB-147
Caution
5. Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
6. Uneven surface
Adjust and keep the holder upright.
DO NOT attach the holder to plaster wall.
Wood screw
Holder for
remote
controller
Ensure the
correct polarity
when inserting.
CHECK MODE
ON/
OFF
CHECK
FILTER
CHECK
TIMER RUN/
CHECK
Back-up button
-
311
-
'10 KX-DB-147
(7) Setting of wireless remote controller and receiver
( ) Methods of avoiding the malfunction due to the mixed communication
Do both procedures and .
This setting is to avoid the mixed communication with other household electric appliances or the mixed communication when
two receivers are located closely.
Setting change of the wireless remote controller
Pressing ACL and AIRFLOW button at the same time or inserting the batteries with pressing AIRFLOW button
will customize the signal.
Note *When the batteries are removed, the setting will return to the default setting. Make sure to reset it when the batter-
ies are replaced.
Setting the PCB of the receiver
Turn SW1-1 off.
fWireless remote controller
SW1-1
ON :
OFF :
ON :
OFF :
ON :
OFF :
Setting to
avoid mixed
communication.
SW1-4
(Auto restart)
SW1-1
(Customized signal
setting to avoid
mixed communication)
SW1-2
(Receiver master/slave
setting)
SW1-2
SW1-4
mixed communication
Auto restart
Nor mal
Remot e
Mast er
Sl ave
Val i d
I nval i d
: Default setting
fPCB of the receiver
-
312
-
'10 KX-DB-147
( ) Change setting of fan speed
While pressing the FAN SPEED button, press the ACL switch, or while pressing the FAN SPEED button, insert the batteries
to the remote controller. Then the fan speed can be changed from 2-speed setting to 3-speed setting.
When changing fan speed setting of remote controller, be sure to perform the same fan speed setting as that of the indoor unit
model to be used.
Attention
When the batteries are removed, it is returned to initial setting (Fan speed setting is 2-speed).
Accordingly when replacing the batteries, be sure to perform the above operation once again.
not to duplicate.
( ) Master/Slave setting when using plural remote controller
( ) Control plural indoor units with one remote controller
Connect the XY terminal with 2-core wire. As for
the size, refer to the following note.
For Packaged air conditioner series, set the indoor
unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from
[0] to [F] so as not to duplicate.
2
2
2
2
2
KIT
Terminal block
Remote controller
Indoor unit (1)
Address (0)
Indoor unit (1)
Address (0)
Indoor unit (16)
Address (F)
Indoor unit
(Non-polarized)
Switch Setting Function
SW1-2
RCN-KIT
SW1[Master]
RCN-KIT
SW1[Slave]
ON Master
OFF Slave
( ) Change setting of auto mode operation
Auto mode operation is prohibited to be selected for KX models (except for KXR models).
Therefore be sure to change setting of remote controller to disable the auto mode operation for these models according to the
following procedure.
While pressing the MODE button, press the ACL switch, or while pressing the MODE button, insert the batteries to the re-
mote controller. Then the auto mode can be invalid.
Attention
When the batteries are removed, it is returned to initial setting (Auto mode becomes valid).
Accordingly when replacing the batteries, be sure to perform the above operation once again.
-
313
-
'10 KX-DB-147
PJZ000Z272
8.2 Simple wired remote controller (RCH-E3)
Models RCH-E3
-
314
-
'10 KX-DB-147
RoHS
-
315
-
'10 KX-DB-147

Simple Remote Controller Installation Manual
Read together with indoor unit's installation manual.
WARNING
Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply
CAUTION
DO NOT leave the remote controller without the upper case.
In case the upper cace needs to be detached, protect the remote controller with a packaging box
or bag in order to keep it away from water and dust.
DO NOT install the remote controller at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation
(2) Places near heat devices (5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
(3) High humidity places (6) Uneven surface
Accessories Remote controller, wood screw (3.516) 2 pieces
Prepare on site Remote controller cord (2 cores) (Refer to [2. Installation and wiring of remote controller])
[In case of embedding cord] Electrical box, M4 screw (2 pieces)
[In case of exposing cord] Cord clamp (if needed)
1. Installation procedure
In case of embedding cord
Make certain to remove the screw on the bottom
surface of the remote controller.
Remove the upper case of the remote controller.
Insert a at-blade screwdriver to a concave portion of the bottom
surface of the remote controller and slightly twist it, and the case is
removed.
Pre-bury the electrical box and remote controller cord.
Prepare two M4 screws (recommended length: 12 16mm), and install the lower case to the electrical box.
Do not use a screw whose screw head is larger than the height of the wall around the screw hole.
Connect the terminals (X and Y) of the remote controller and the terminals (X and Y) of the indoor
unit. (No polarity of X and Y)
Mount the upper case for restoring to its former state so as not to crimp the remote controller cord,
and secure with the removed screw.
In case of exposing cord
Make certain to remove a screw on the bottom surface of the
remote controller.
Remove the upper case of the remote controller.
Insert a at-blade screwdriver to a concave portion of
the bottom surface of the remote control and slightly
twist it, and the case is removed.
The remote controller cord can be extracted from the
upper center.
After the thin part in the upper side of the remote
controller upper case is scraped with a nipper or knife,
remove burr with a le.
The lower case of the remote controller is mounted to
a at wall with two accessory wood screws.
Connect the terminals (X and Y) of the remote controller and
the terminals (X and Y) of the indoor unit. (No polarity of X and
Y)
The wiring route is as shown in the right.
The wiring in the remote controller case should be 0.3 mm
2
(recommended) to 0.5 mm
2
at
maximum.
Further, peel off the sheath.
The peeling length of each wiring is as follows:
X wiring : 160mm
Y wiring : 150mm
Mount the upper case for restoring to its former state so as not to
crimp the remote controller cord, and secure with the removed screw.
In the case of exposing installation, secure the remote controller cord to the wall surface with a
cord clamp so as not to loosen the remote controller cord.
2. Installation and wiring of remote controller
2
2 core wires or cables. (on-site conguration)
Maximum prolongation of remote controller wiring is 600 m.
But, the wiring in the remote controller case should be 0.3mm
2
(recommended) to 0.5mm
2
.
Change the wire size outside of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is
necessary at the wire
connecting section. Be careful about contact failure.
100 - 200m0.5mm
2
2 cores
Under 300m0.75mm
2
2 cores
Under 400m1.25mm
2
2 cores
Under 600m2.0mm
2
2 cores
PJZ012D069
Screw
Lower case
Wall
surface
Remote controller cord

Electrical box
Prepare on site
Two M4 screws (head: 8 or less) (prepare on site)
Screw
Sheath
Peeling length
Wiring outlet
Lower case
Upper case
Upper case
Thin part
-
316
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
317
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
318
-
'10 KX-DB-147
[In the case of selecting the indoor unit function (07-14)]
88 blinks on the temperature setting indicators.
(blinking for approximately 2 to 10 seconds while data is read)

After that, the current setting number of the selected function number blinks.
(Example)
Function number: 07 (lighting)
Setting number: 01 (blinking)
Proceed to .
[Note]
a. In the case of connecting one remote control to plural indoor units, the display
will be as follows:
Indoor unit No. display: U 000 (blinking)
(Display the lowest number among the connected indoor units.)
b. Press TEMP or TEMP button.
Select the indoor unit No. to be set.
If U ALL is selected, the same setting can be set to all units.
c. Press MODE button.
Decide the indoor unit No.
88 blinks on the temperature setting indicators. (blinking for 2 to 10 seconds while data
is read)
When AIR CON NO. button is pressed, go back to the indoor unit selection display (for
example, U 000 blinking).
Press TEMP or TEMP button.
Select the setting number
Press MODE button.
The setting is completed.
Light is on for approximately 3 to 20 seconds while data of the decided function No. and
setting No. is transmitted.
(Example)
Indoor unit No.: U 000 (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Function number: 07 (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Setting number: 01 (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Then, the screen goes back to the function number blinking indication , if the setting
is sequentially conducted, continue with the same procedures. If the setting is nished,
proceed to .
Stop air-conditioning, and simultaneously press AIR CON NO. and MODE buttons
at the same time for over three seconds.
The function number 01 blinks in the upper right.
Select the function number.
Press MODE button.
Decide the function number.
[In the case of selecting the remote controller function (01-06)]
The current setting number of the selected function number blinks
(Example)
Function number: 01 (lighting)
Setting number: 01 (blinking)
Select the setting number.
Press MODE button.
Light is on for approximately 3 to 20 seconds while data of the
decided function No. and setting No. is transmitted.
(Example)
Function number: 01 (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Setting number: 01 (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Then, the screen goes back to the function number blinking
indication , if the setting is sequentially conducted, continue
with the same procedures. If the setting is nished, proceed to .
Press ON/OFF button.
Function number
Function number
Setting number
Function number
Setting number
Function number
Setting number
Function number Indoor unit No.
Indoor unit No.
(In the case of
connecting
plural indoor
units)
Function number
Setting number
Even if ON/OFF button is pressed during setting, the setting is ended. However, any details where the setting has not been completed will be ineffective.
The setting contents are stored in the controller, and even if the power failure occur, this will not be lost.
[Conrmation method for current setting]
According to the operation, the setting number displayed rst after selecting function number and pressing MODE button is the currently set content.
(However, in the case of selecting U ALL (all units), the setting number of the lowest number among the indoor units is displayed.)
Decide button
Start button
Select button
End button
7. How to set functions by button operation
-
319
-
'10 KX-DB-147

8.3 Fan controller kit for high static pressure duct. (U-FCRA)
PJD012D049
-
320
-
'10 KX-DB-147
-
321
-
'10 KX-DB-147
0
45 50 55 60
66
65
50
100
150
200
S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)

Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Standard
Air flow(m
3
/min)
Example
of duct
High
Low
4
5
7
8
6
5
4
6
7
8
Notes (1) Nos., and of fan controller should not be used
because the fan motor could produce electromagnetic
noise.
Model FDU224
Standard rating point rated air volume at 100Pa
Model FDU280
Standard rating point rated air volume at 100Pa
0
60 65 70 75 80 85 88
50
100
150
200
S
t
a
t
i
c

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

(
P
a
)

Example
of duct
High
Low
Upper
limit
Lower
limit
Standard
Air flow(m
3
/min)
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
Notes (1) Nos., and of fan controller should not be used
because the fan motor could produce electromagnetic
noise.
Characteristics of fan
VRF INVERTER MULTI-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Systems Headquarters
16-5, 2-chome, Kounan, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-8215, Japan
Fax : (03) 6716-5926
Because of our policy of continuous improvement, we reserve the right to make changes in all specifications without notice.
Copyright MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES.LTD c

10 - KX-DB-147 VRF Inverter Multi-System Air Conditioners 220V (FDC224-FDC335)

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

10 - KX-DB-147 VRF Inverter Multi-System Air Conditioners 220V (FDC224-FDC335)

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

KX6 series

FDC224KXE6M, 280KXE6M, 335KXE6M

RCN-K71-E) ................................................. 292

Models FDC280KXE6M, FDCS280KXE6M

G !nspoot1on ho!o 9OOX98O

Suspons1on bo!ts p1toh

Sorv1oo spaoo from !owor

RANGE OF USAGE & LIMITATIONS

Attaching the air return grille from the hinge side.

Select the lower limit position of louver.

Function Setting by Remote Controller

Function Setting by Remote Controller (continued)

Function Setting by Remote Controller (continued)

Power suppl] (outdoor unit sidej

A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

0utdoor unit address setting

A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

A1B1 A2B2 A1B1 A2B2

[l/U O1O 0/U O1

7 segment displa] indication in automatic address setting

Remote controller cord

Você também pode gostar